Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual PDF

1 of 322
1 of 322

Summary of Content for Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual PDF

VOLVO V50

Owners Manual Web Edition

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte- nance information contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

00 00 Introduction

Important information................................. 8 Volvo and the environment....................... 12

01 01 Safety

Seatbelts................................................... 16 Airbag system........................................... 19 Airbags...................................................... 20 Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22 Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24 Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 26 WHIPS....................................................... 27 When the systems deploy......................... 29 Crash mode.............................................. 30 Child safety............................................... 31 02

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 46 Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 48 Driver's door control panel....................... 50 Combined instrument panel...................... 51 Indicator and warning symbols................. 52 Information display................................... 56 Electrical socket........................................ 58 Lighting panel........................................... 60 Left-hand stalk switch............................... 64 Right-hand stalk switch............................ 67 Cruise control*.......................................... 70 Keypad in the steering wheel*.................. 72 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn- ing flashers................................................ 73 Parking brake............................................ 74 Power windows......................................... 75 Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 77 Power sunroof* ........................................ 81 Personal preferences................................ 83

HomeLink *.............................................. 86

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 03 Climate control

General information on climate control..... 92 Manual climate control, AC....................... 94 Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 97 Air distribution......................................... 100 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................. 101 Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....... 104

04 04 Interior

Front seats.............................................. 108 Interior lighting........................................ 111 Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 114 Rear seat................................................. 118 Cargo area.............................................. 120

05 05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade......... 126 Active locks............................................. 129 Keyless drive*.......................................... 130 Battery in remote control key.................. 133 Locking and unlocking............................ 134 Child safety locks.................................... 137 Alarm*..................................................... 138

Table of contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 06 Starting and driving

General.................................................... 144 Refuelling................................................ 146 Alcolock*................................................. 150 Starting the engine.................................. 154 Starting the engine Flexifuel................. 156 Keyless drive*.......................................... 158 Manual gearbox...................................... 159 Automatic gearbox.................................. 160 DRIVe Start-Stop*................................... 165 Brake system.......................................... 169 DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem*......................................................... 171 Park Assist*............................................. 173 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 175 Towing and recovery.............................. 178 Start assistance...................................... 181 Driving with a trailer................................ 182 Towing equipment*................................. 184 Detachable towbar* ............................... 186 Loading................................................... 190 Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 191

07 07 Wheels and tyres

General.................................................... 194 Tyre pressure.......................................... 198 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 199 Changing wheels.................................... 201 Emergency puncture repair*................... 203

08 08 Car care

Cleaning.................................................. 210 Touching up paintwork........................... 214 Rustproofing........................................... 215

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

09 09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service........................................... 218 Self-maintenance.................................... 219 Bonnet and engine compartment........... 220 Oils and fluids......................................... 222 Wiper blades........................................... 228 Battery..................................................... 230 Replacing bulbs...................................... 234 Fuses...................................................... 241 10

10 Infotainment system

General.................................................... 252 Audio functions....................................... 254 Radio functions....................................... 259 CD functions........................................... 264 Menu structure audio system.............. 267 Phone functions*..................................... 268 Menu structure phone*......................... 275 Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 278 11

11 Specifications

Type designation..................................... 286 Dimensions and weights......................... 288 Engine specifications.............................. 291 Engine oil................................................ 292 Fluids and lubricants............................... 294 Fuel......................................................... 297 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres- sure ........................................................ 299 Electrical system..................................... 301 Type approval......................................... 303 Symbols in the display............................ 304

Table of contents

6

12 12 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 308

Table of contents

7

Introduction

Important information

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Reading the Owner's Manual

Introduction

A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different sit- uations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual.

The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Volvo Car Corporation

Option

All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, this manual also describes options (factory fitted equip- ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

The equipment described in the owner's man- ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.

Footnote

There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts

There are displays in the car that show text messages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- sage texts on the information display (e.g. AUDIO SETTINGS).

Decals

The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the

Introduction

Important information

9

warning is ignored, may result in serious per- sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G 03 15 92

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

Information

G 03 15 93

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.

Procedure lists

Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja- cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists

A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Introduction

Important information

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Coolant

Engine oil

To be continued

This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page.

Recording data

Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle's operation and function- ality. Some of the computers can record infor- mation during normal driving if they detect an error. In addition, information is recorded in the event of a crash or incident. Parts of the recor- ded information are required so that techni- cians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. In addition to this, the infor- mation is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety, as the information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents and injuries. The information includes details of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard to engine, throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst other things. This information may include details regarding the

way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi- cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use, steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa- tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers for a certain length of time, but also as a result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal require- ments and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri- bed information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose such infor- mation to authorities such as police authorities, or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it.

To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo, and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and main- tenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with

applicable legal requirements. For further infor- mation - contact a Volvo dealer.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car's electrical system. Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car's computer system. We therefore recommend that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system.

Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call *

Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that consists of safety, security and comfort serv- ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a change of owner, it is very important that these services are discontinued so that the former owner cannot access the services in the car. Contact the call centre by pressing the ON

CALL button in the car or contact an author- ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo On Call.

Introduction

Important information

11

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- mation concerning your car.

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

12 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G 00 00 00

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values which influence all opera- tions. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac- tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- ration has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.

Fuel consumption

Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis- sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- sumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control

Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment

A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom- ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out- side.

The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- tored continuously and if there is an increase in

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13

the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.

Interior

The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- sant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally-compatible materials.

Volvo workshops and the environment

Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte- nance of your car it becomes part of our sys- tem. We make clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact

You can easily help reduce environmental impact - here are a few tips:

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.

Drive economically - think ahead.

Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner's manual's instructions - follow the Service and War- ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine rea- ches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases wind resis- tance 4 times.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see the pages 144 and 297.

Recycling

As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an envi- ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

The owner's manual and the environment

The Forest Stewardship Council symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16 Airbag system......................................................................................... 19 Airbags.................................................................................................... 20 Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22 Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24 Inflatable Curtain (IC).............................................................................. 26 WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27 When the systems deploy....................................................................... 29 Crash mode............................................................................................ 30 Child safety............................................................................................. 31

SAFETY

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

16

General information

G 02 01 04

Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- tioned low down.

Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

Putting on a seatbelt

Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click" indicates that the seatbelt has locked.

Releasing the seatbelt

Press the red lock button and then let the seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-

drawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following

do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly

ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything

the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)

tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam- age. The new seatbelt must be type- approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

17

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G 02 01 05

The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way. The diagonal section of the seat- belt should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). They should strive to posi- tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- ble between their abdomen and the steering wheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G 01 80 84

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder. The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time depend- ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Rear seat

The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press- ing the indicator stalk's READ button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during a journey. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning ceases when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.

The message on the information display show- ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- able. Press the READ button to see stored messages.

Certain markets

An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

18

Seatbelt tensioner

The front seatbelts and the two for the outer rear seats are equipped with seatbelt tension- ers. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi- ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro- vides more effective restraint for occupants.

WARNING

Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func- tion as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

01 Safety

Airbag system 01

19

Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel

The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel illuminates when the remote con- trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. The symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds pro- vided the airbag system is fault-free.

As well as the warning symbol, a message may appear on the dis- play in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and the message SRS AIRBAG

SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS

AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT

appears in the display. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

20

Airbag system

G 02 01 11

SRS system, left-hand drive

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely nor- mal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, takes place within tenths of a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

G 02 01 10

SRS system, right-hand drive

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver's side and passenger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags is deployed.

The capacities of the airbags are also adap- ted to the collision force to which they are subjected.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

21

G 02 01 13

Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive and right-hand drive cars.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the instrument panel where the passenger air- bag is located.

Airbag on the driver's side

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer- ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS

AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

Passenger airbag

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- ger side. It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. The cover panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and back against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.1

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Children under 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Key switch off - PACOS*

General information

The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch

The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open, (see under the heading below, Activating/deactivating).

Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is used to change position.

For information on the key blade, see page 127.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS), then the airbag will always be activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the roof console indicates that the airbag is deacti- vated, and if the warning symbol for the air- bag system is also displayed on the com- bined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.

Activating/deactivating

Switch location

The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, children taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Messages

2

G 01 80 82

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof con- sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus- tration).

G 01 80 83

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof console indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

NOTE

When the remote control key is turned to key position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is displayed on the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see page 19.

Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information about the different key positions, see page 154.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

24

Side airbag

G 02 01 18

Side airbag locations.

In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and are an important part of the SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not place any objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbags

The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated1 passenger air- bag.

Location

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

25

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

26

Properties

G 01 99 85

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the headlining along both sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under

the top edge of the side windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the head- lining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

27

Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS

G 02 03 47

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- cially designed head restraints for the front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the col- lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat

When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/booster

cushions

The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position

For the best possible protection, the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

28

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

G 02 01 25

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

G 02 01 26

Do not place objects in the rear seat that may pre- vent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

29

Activating the systems

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision

Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat In a frontal collision

Airbags In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA

Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA

Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have been deployed, the follow- ing is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The airbag, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion

WARNING

The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liq- uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec- ommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

01 Safety

Crash mode 01

30

Driving after a collision

G 02 90 42

If the car is involved in a collision, the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on the information display. This means that the car has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col- lision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the car

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

Firstly, remove the remote control key and then reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car. If CRASH MODE SEE

MANUAL is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once mov- ing.

Moving the car

If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH

MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not move the car further than nec- essary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in crash mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you always engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to NORMAL MODE after CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been displayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in crash mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

31

Children should sit comfortably and safely

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as pos- sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age.

The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size, for more information, see page 33.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- vo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child seats

G 02 01 28

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included with the product.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat to the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- age the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

Location of child seats

You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1.

one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.

Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A child in the front passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

32

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated2.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel on the passenger side, see the illustration on page 22.

2 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

33

Recommended child seats3

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max. 10 kg

Group 0+

max. 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 03301146

(U)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

34

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9 18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

(L)

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

(L)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

35

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(L)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

36

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2/3

15 36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without back- rest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 03139

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without back- rest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 03139

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without back- rest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 03139

(UF)

Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.

Type approval: E5 03168

(B)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

A For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 37

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated4.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Integrated booster cushions* G 01 50 13

Volvos integrated booster cushion for the outer rear seats is specially designed to pro-

vide optimum safety for children. Combined with the regular seatbelts the integrated booster cushion is approved for children weighing between 15 and 36 kg.

Raising the booster cushion

G 02 08 08

Pull that handle to raise the booster cush- ion.

Grasp the cushion with both hands and push it backwards.

Push until it locks in place.

WARNING

The booster cushion must be in the locked position before the child is placed there.

Check that:

the booster cushion in locked in position

the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted, and that the seatbelt is positioned correctly across the shoulder

the hip strap is low across the hips for opti- mum protection

the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder

Carefully adjust the position of the head restraint to suit the child.

4 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

38

WARNING

Repair or replacement should only be per- formed by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion yourself.

If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in con- junction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protec- tion. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

Lowering the booster cushion

G 01 45 07

Pull the handle.

Lower the seat and press until it locks.

NOTE

Remember to stow away the booster cush- ion before lowering the rear seat backrest.

Child safety locks, rear doors

The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside. For more information see page 137.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats

G 01 52 68

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see illustration above).

Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

39

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

Size classes

Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Consequently, there is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct child seat (see the following table).

Size class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- facing child seat

Size class

Description

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front- facing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing child seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left- hand

G Transverse infant seat, right- hand

WARNING

Never place a child in the passenger seat if the car is equipped with an activated airbag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation then the car model must be included on the child seat's vehicle list.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda- tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

40

Types of ISOFIX child seat

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OKA

(IL)

C X OKA

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OKA

(IL)

C X OKA

(IL)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

41

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB

(IUF)

B1 X OKB

(IUF)

A X OKB

(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A In order to be able to fit the infant/child seat in the rear seat, the front passenger seat has been adjusted to a location in front of centre position. B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

42

Upper mounting points for child seats

G 02 97 03

Location, upper attachment points.

The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats. These mounting points are located on the rear side of the rear seat.

The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.

The child seat's straps must be routed between the head restraint and the backrest.

NOTE

For cars with folding head restraints on the outside seats the head restraints should be folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat.

NOTE

For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area, this must be removed before a child seat can be fitted in the mounting points.

For detailed information on how to secure the child seat in the upper mounting points, refer to the instructions from the child seat manu- facturer.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attach- ment point.

01 Safety

01

43

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 46 Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 48 Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 50 Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 51 Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 52 Information display.................................................................................. 56 Electrical socket...................................................................................... 58 Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 60 Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 64 Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 67 Cruise control*........................................................................................ 70 Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................ 72 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 73 Parking brake.......................................................................................... 74 Power windows....................................................................................... 75 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 77 Power sunroof* ...................................................................................... 81 Personal preferences.............................................................................. 83

HomeLink *............................................................................................ 86

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

46

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

47

Steering wheel adjustment

Bonnet release

Control panel

Direction indicators, main beam, trip com- puter

Lighting, fuel filler flap opener

Door handle, lock button.

Air vents in dashboard

Air vent for side window

Cruise control

Horn, airbag

Combined instrument panel

Keypad for infotainment system

Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp washers

Ignition switch

Sunroof controls

No function

No function

Switch for interior lighting

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- bag indicator

Interior rearview mirror

Display for climate control and infotain- ment system

Infotainment system

Controls for climate control, infotainment system and personal preferences

Climate control

Gear lever

Hazard warning flashers

Door handle

Glovebox

Parking brake

Electrical socket/cigarette lighter

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

48

G 02

82 04

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

49

Electrical socket, cigarette lighter

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment

Parking brake

Control panel

Glovebox

Door handle

Air vent for side window

Air vents in dashboard

Gear lever

Climate control

Controls for climate control, infotainment system and personal preferences

Infotainment system

Display for climate control and infotain- ment system

Interior rearview mirror

Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- bag indicator

Switch for interior lighting

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

No function

No function

Sunroof controls

Ignition switch

Windscreen wipers and washers, head- lamp washers

Cruise control

Combined instrument panel

Horn, airbag

Keypad for infotainment system

Hazard warning flashers

Door handle, lock button

Lighting, fuel filler flap opener

Direction indicators, main beam, trip com- puter

Bonnet release

Steering wheel adjustment

02 Instruments and controls

Driver's door control panel

02

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driver's door control panel

Disengaging the rear power windows. Electric child safety lock*

Power windows

Door mirror, left-hand side

Door mirrors, setting

Door mirror, right-hand side

02 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel

02

51

G 02

90 46

Speedometer.

Direction indicators, left.

Warning symbol.

Information display Shows information or warning messages, outside temperature and clock. When the outside temperature is between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake illu- minates on the display. This warns of icy roads. The outside temperature gauge may show a slightly high reading after the car has been stationary.

Information symbol.

Direction indicator, right.

Tachometer Indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Indicator and warning symbols.

Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, pag e 65.

Main beam indicator.

Display Display for automatic gear posi- tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and cruise control.

Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) and gear positions in the D2 and DRIVe model, see page 159.

Button for trip meter Used to measure short distances. Short presses on the but- ton switches between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec- onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.

Temperature gauge - Used for the engine cooling system. A message will appear on the display if the temperature becomes too high and the gauge goes into the red zone. Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front of the air intake, for example, reduce the cooling capacity at high outside tempera- tures and high engine loads.

Indicator and warning symbols.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

52

Functionality check, symbols

All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate when the remote control key is turned to posi- tion II before starting. This is to check that the symbols are working. When the engine starts, all the symbols should go out except the park- ing brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start within five seconds, all symbols extin- guish except the symbols for a fault in the car's emissions system and for low oil pressure. Certain symbols may have no function, depending on the car's specifica- tions.

Symbols in the centre of the instrument panel

G 03 07 55

The red warning symbol illumi- nates when a fault has been indi- cated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the

information display at the same time. The sym- bol remains visible until the fault has been rec- tified but the text message can be cleared with the READ button, see page 56. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

When the symbol illuminates:

1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car further.

2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using READ.

The yellow information symbol illu- minates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared using the READ but- ton, see page 56, or disappears

automatically after a period of time (time depending on which function is indicated).

The yellow information symbol can also illumi- nate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or disappear automatically after a time.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 56.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53

Indicator symbols left-hand side

G 02 90 48

Fault in car's emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp

Stability system DSTC

No function

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Emissions system

If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work-

shop for inspection.

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS func- tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys- tem checked if the symbol remains lit. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp

This symbol is lit when the rear fog lamp is on.

Stability system DSTC*

For information on the system's functions and symbols, see page 171.

Engine preheater (diesel)

This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating occurs when the temperature is below -2 C. The car can be started once the symbol goes out.

Low level in fuel tank

When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

54

Indicator symbols right-hand side

G 02 90 49

Indicator symbol for trailer

Parking brake applied

Airbags SRS

Low oil pressure

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Indicator symbol for trailer

This symbol flashes when the direction indicators are used and the trailer is connected. If the sym- bol does not flash then one of the lamps on the trailer or the car is

faulty.

Parking brake applied

The symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied. Always pull the parking brake lever to the end position.

NOTE

The symbol illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

Airbags SRS

If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or IC system. Volvo recommends that

drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection.

Low oil pressure2

If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pres- sure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the

symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder

This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging

If this symbol illuminates while driving, a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Volvo recom- mends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low.

2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 56.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

55

Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 226. If the reservoir level is below MIN then the car should not be driven fur- ther. Volvo recommends that the car is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop to have the brake system checked.

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- ing.

4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 226.

5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to

have the brake system checked. Volvo rec- ommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN

then the car should not be driven any fur- ther. Have the car transported to a work- shop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Reminder doors not closed

If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the tailgate is not properly closed, the driver will be reminded of this.

Low speed

If the car moves at a speed less than 5 km/h, the information sym- bol illuminates and DRIVER

DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER

DOOR OPEN,LEFT REAR

DOOR OPEN, BONNET OPEN or RIGHT

REAR DOOR OPEN is shown on the display. Stop the car safely as soon as possible and close the door or bonnet.

High speed

If the car is moving faster than 10 km/h, the symbol illuminates and one of the texts indicated in the preceding paragraph appears on the display.

Tailgate reminder

If the tailgate is open, this informa- tion symbol will illuminate and TAILGATE OPEN will appear on the display.

3 Only cars with alarm.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

02

56

Messages

G 02 90 50

When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates the information display shows a supplemen- tary message.

Press the READ button (1).

Switch between messages with the READ but- ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory until the fault is rectified.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.

Message Specification

STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.

SERVICE

URGENTA Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car immediately.

SEE MANUALA Read the Owner's Manual.

SERVICE

REQUIREDA Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car as soon as possible.

HIGH ENGINE

TEMP STOP

ENGINE

Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.

BOOK TIME FOR

SERVICE

Time to book regular service. Volvo rec- ommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out the service.

Message Specification

TIME FOR REGU-

LAR SERVICE

Time for regular service. Volvo rec- ommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out the service. The timing is determined by the number of kil- ometres driven, number of months since the last serv- ice, engine running time and oil grade.

SERVICE OVER-

DUE

If the service inter- vals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop car- ries out the service.

TRANSMISSION

OIL CHANGE NEE-

DED

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car as soon as possible.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

02

57

Message Specification

REMINDER

CHECK OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level. The message is shown every 10 000 km (certain engine variants). For information on checking the oil level, see page 222.

SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE OWNER

MANUAL

Diesel particle filter requires regenera- tion, see page 148.

DSTC SPIN CON-

TROL OFF

The function of the stability and traction control system is reduced, see page 172 for more variants.

Message Specification

TRANSMISSION

PERFORMANCE

LOW

The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive carefully until the message clears, see page 163.

If shown repeatedly then Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contac- ted.

Message Specification

TRANSMISSION

OIL TEMP HIGH

Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disen- gage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clears. For more information, see page 163.

TRANSM OIL

TEMP STOP

SAFELY

Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.B

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see page 163.

02 Instruments and controls

Electrical socket

02

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

12 V electrical socket

G 01 96 21

Electrical socket and cigarette lighter.

The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I, see page 154.

IMPORTANT

Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both sockets are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

NOTE

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the remote con- trol key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the parking heater is activated at a preset time.

For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!

Cigarette lighter*

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

Electrical socket in the rear seat

G 02 90 82

Electrical socket in the rear seat.

The electrical socket in the rear seat can be used for various accessories, see "12 V elec- trical socket" above.

NOTE

Cigarette lighter does not work in this socket.

The electrical socket is designed for 12 V. For the socket to supply current, the remote con- trol key must be in at least position I, see page 154.

02 Instruments and controls

Electrical socket

02

59

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 02 01 39

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

Light switches

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting

Front fog lamps*

Opening the fuel filler flap

Rear fog lamp

Posi- tion

Specification

Automatic/deactivated dipped beam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Main beam and main beam flash work in this position.

Headlamp levelling

The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz- zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam.

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the end positions.

3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively to raise or lower beam alignment.

Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* have automatic headlamp levelling, so there is no control (1).

Position/parking lamps

Position/parking lamps can be switched on irrespective of remote control key position.

Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre position.

When the remote control key is in position II the position/parking lamps and number plate light- ing are always on.

Headlamps

Automatic dipped beam*

Dipped beam comes on automatically when the remote control key is turned to position II, except when the headlamp control (2) is in the centre position. If necessary, the automatic dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec- ommends that this is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Automatic dipped beam, main beam

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Dipped beam is activated by means of turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise to the end position.

3. Main beam is activated by means of mov- ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and releasing it, see page 64.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

The lamps are switched off automatically when the remote control key is turned to position I or 0.

Instrument lighting

The instrument lighting is switched on when the remote control key is in position II and the headlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi- tions. The lighting is automatically dimmed during the day and can be controlled manually at night.

Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter or dimmer lighting.

Enhanced display lighting

To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter, clock and outside temperature gauge, these illuminate when the car is unlocked and when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. The displays extinguish when the car is locked.

Fog lamps

NOTE

Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from country to country.

Front fog lamps*

The front fog lamps can be switched on along with the headlamps or the position lamps/park- ing lamps.

Press the button (4).

The light in the button (4) illuminates when the front fog lamps are switched on.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with the headlamps or the front fog lamps.

Press the button (6).

The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com- bined instrument panel and the light in the but- ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Fuel filler flap

Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when the car is unlocked, see page 134.

Active Xenon headlamps*

G 02 65 07

Lighting panel, for active Xenon headlamps

If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum light- ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

The LED illuminates when the function is activated. The LED flashes and an error mes- sage is shown on the information display in the

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

event of a malfunction. The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.

The function can be deactivated/activated with the headlamp control.

G 02 07 89

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

Daytime running lights - DRL*

To save fuel, daytime running lights (Daytime Running Light) can be selected during the day instead of the more energy-intensive dipped beam. The daytime running lights mounted in the spoiler use bright, low-energy diode tech- nology.

Position A automatically gives DRL daytime run- ning lights during the day.

Posi- tion

Specification

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights when the car is being driven. Automatic switching to parking lights when the car is parked.

Headlamps and position lamps

Daytime running lights during daytime driving. Automatic switching to headlamps and position lamps in poor light con- ditions and when windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) then this function is also activated.

With the light switch in position A, the daytime running lights are activated automatically dur- ing the day. This is regulated by a light sensor which switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam off the main headlamps at dusk or when the daylight becomes too weak.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

63

NOTE

To achieve minimal energy consumption, the rear lights are also switched off when switching automatically from dipped beam to DRLs.

WARNING

This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a cor- rect state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

Brake light

The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 170.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

64

Stalk switch positions

3 4

1

2

1

2

G 02 63 80

Direction indicators - short flash sequence

Direction indicators - continuous flash sequence

Main beam flash

Home safe lighting and switching between main and dipped beam.

Direction indicators

Short flash sequence

Move the stalk switch up or down to position (1) and release. > The direction indicators flash 3 times

and the stalk switch returns to its origi- nal position.

Continuous flash sequence

Move the stalk switch up or down to end position (2). > The stalk switch remains in its end posi-

tion and is moved back manually, or automatically by steering wheel move- ment.

Main beam flash

Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to position (3). > Main beam comes on until the stalk

switch is released.

Main beam flash only works when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Switching between main and dipped beam

Move the stalk switch to the end position (4) and release.

The remote control key must be in position II and the headlamp control in end position, see page 60, for main beam to be switched on.

Home safe lighting

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. The standard delay is 301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90 seconds, see page 84.

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.

2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to position (3) and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

1 Factory settings.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65

Trip computer*

G 02 90 52

READ - confirms

Thumbwheel2 browse between menus and options in the trip computer list.

RESET2 - resets

Controls

To scroll through trip computer information turn the thumbwheel either up or down in steps. The menus are in an infinite loop.

NOTE

If a warning message interrupts while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by pressing the READ button and revert to the trip computer function.

Functions

The trip computer displays the following infor- mation:

--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED

--.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS

--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE

--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

DSTC ON *, see page 171

--- MPH ACTUAL SPEED 3

AVERAGE SPEED

Average speed is calculated from the latest reset, which is performed with the RESET but- ton.

INSTANTANEOUS

Current fuel consumption is calculated every second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the car is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display.

During the period for regeneration4 fuel con- sumption may increase, see page 148.

AVERAGE

Average fuel consumption is calculated from the latest reset, which is performed with the RESET button.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.

KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

The range to empty is calculated based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km. No guaranteed range remains when the display shows "--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

". Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if fuel consumption is changed due to a change in driving style or if a fuel-driven heater is used for example.

MPH ACTUAL SPEED3

Current speed is displayed in mph.

2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system. 3 Certain markets. 4 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

66

Resetting

1. Select --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or --.- L/100 KM AVERAGE

2. Reset with one press of the RESET button.

3. One long press of the RESET button (at least 5 seconds) resets both average speed and average consumption simulta- neously.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Windscreen wipers

Windscreen and headlamp washers

Rain sensor - On/Off

Thumbwheel

Rear window wiper and washer

Windscreen wipers off

The windscreen wipers are off when the stalk switch is in position 0.

Single sweep

Raise the stalk switch to make a single sweep.

Intermittent wiping

You can adjust and set a suitable speed for intermittent wiping. Turn the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter interval between sweeps. Turn it down to increase the delay.

Continuous wiping

The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen (and rear window) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Windscreen/headlamp washer

Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. The wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch is released.

High-pressure headlamp washing*

High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed as follows:

Dipped beam selected with the switch on light- ing panel:

The headlamps are washed the first time the windscreen is washed. Within the next ten minutes, they are washed every fifth wash cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer interval the headlamps are washed each time.

Parking/position lamps selected with the switch on the lighting panel:

Active Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.

Halogen headlamps are not washed.

The switch on the lighting panel is in position 0:

Active Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.

Halogen headlamps are not washed.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rear window wiper and washer

0

G 02 14 18

Move the stalk switch forward to start rear win- dow washing and wiping. The wiper blade makes several extra sweeps once washing has finished. The button at the end of the stalk switch has three positions:

Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of the button.

Neutral position: Function deactivated.

Constant speed: Depress the bottom of the button.

Wiper reversing

Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window

wiping. If the rear window wiper is already on at normal speed, no change is made.

The function for intermittent wiping for reverse can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rain sensor*

G 02 90 53

The rain sensor automatically activates the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel (C), see page 67.

Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen- sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an

extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upwards).

On/Off

When activating the rain sensor, the remote control key must be in position I or II and the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi- tion 0 (not activated).

Activating the rain sensor:

Press the button (B), see page 67. A display symbol shows that the rain sensor is active.

To turn the rain sensor off, either:

1. Press button (B)

2. Press the stalk switch downward to another wiper program. If the stalk switch is raised, the rain sensor will remain active, the wipers make an extra sweep and then return to rain sensor mode when the stalk is released to position 0 (not activated), see page 67.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the igni- tion is switched off.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

69

IMPORTANT

At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while the remote control key is in position I or II. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could start swiping and become damaged.

Thumbwheel

Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain sensor is selected.

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activating

G 02 01 41

The controls for cruise control are to the left of the steering wheel.

Setting the desired speed:

1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is shown on the combined instrument panel.

2. Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed. CRUISE-ON appears in the combined instrument panel.

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G 02 90 54

Increase or decrease the speed by press- ing and holding + or . The speed of the car when the button is released is set as the new speed.

A brief press (less than half a second) on + or changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.

NOTE

A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the programmed speed.

Temporary disengagement

Press 0 to disengage the cruise control temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the combined instrument panel. The speed set earlier is stored in the memory.

The cruise control is also temporarily disen- gaged when:

the brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed

speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when trav- elling uphill

the gear selector is moved to position N

wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs

a temporary increase in speed lasts longer than one minute.

1 Depending on engine type.

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71

Return to the set speed

Press this button to resume the previously set speed. CRUISE

ON appears on the combined instrument panel.

Disengaging

Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise control. CRUISE ON clears on the com- bined instrument panel.

02 Instruments and controls

Keypad in the steering wheel*

02

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Button functions

The keypad is available in two versions depending on the equipment in the car.

The four buttons at the bottom of the steering wheel keypad control the radio and the phone. The function of a button depends on which system is active. The steering wheel keypad can be used to scroll between preset stations, change CD tracks and adjust the volume.

Press and hold one of the arrow keys to fast forward/reverse or search for the next station.

The phone must be active to make settings in the phone system. Activate the phone function with the PHONE button in the centre console

in order to enable control of the phone system with the arrow keys.

To return to Audio only, press EXIT.. To return to the phone menu, press EXIT once again.

With the ENTER button you can select, acti- vate and deactivate options in menus. The but- ton can also be used to access the folder struc- ture and start the playback of audio files if a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/ CD changer*. For more information, see page 264.

02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers

02

73

Steering wheel adjustment

G 02 01 43

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach.

1. Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you best.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, never while driving. Before driving, check that the steering wheel is fixed in position.

Hazard warning flashers

G 02 01 44

Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction indicators flash) when the car is stopped where it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press the button to activate the function.

A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking activates the hazard warning flashers automat- ically, see page 170. The function can be deactivated with the button.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to coun- try.

02 Instruments and controls

Parking brake

02

74

General

Instrument panel warning symbol and warning label for risk of crushing.

The lever is located between the front seats.

WARNING

Make sure that children, other passengers or objects are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when the parking brake is applied or released by the driver.

Applying the parking brake

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the lever firmly.

> The instrument panel's warning symbol is illuminated.

NOTE

The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.

4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be pulled up a little bit further.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked facing uphill:

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

WARNING

Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto- matic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

Disengaging the parking brake

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the button, lower the parking brake lever and release the button. > The instrument panel's warning symbol

is switched off.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

75

Operation

The power windows are operated using the controls in the doors. The key position must be I or II for the power windows to operate.

The windows continue to work for a limited amount of time when the car is stopped and after the remote control key is removed, provi- ded none of the doors is opened. Operate the windows with caution.

To open a window:

Depress the front of the control.

To close a window:

Raise the front of the control.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Remote control and lock buttons

To operate the power windows with lock but- tons and remote control, see pages 126 and 134.

WARNING

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows. Pay close attention if the rear door windows are controlled from the driver's door or if the windows are closed with the remote control.

Driver's door

Controls, power windows.

Rear window controls

Front window controls

The driver can operate all of the power win- dows from the driver's seat.

The windows can be opened and closed in two ways:

Manual operation

Depress one of the controls (1) or (2) gently or raise it gently. The power window opens or closes as long as the switch is actuated.

Automatic operation

Fully depress one of the controls (2) or raise it, then release. The side window will then open or close automatically. If the window is obstructed by an object, the movement will stop.

WARNING

The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of them being blocked works with both automatic and manual closing, although not with pinch protection deployed.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

76

Blocking power windows in the rear doors

Blocking rear power windows and electric child safety locks*.

The light in the switch is lit

The rear door windows can only be operated from the driver's door.

The light in the switch is extinguished

The rear door windows can be operated both with the control on each rear door and with the controls on the driver's door.

NOTE

If the car has electric child safety locks on the rear doors, the light indicates that these are also activated. The doors then cannot be opened from the inside. A text message is shown on the display when the electric child safety locks are activated.

Front passenger seat

Front passenger seat.

The control in the front passenger door oper- ates that window only.

Rear power windows

The rear door windows can be operated with the control on each door or with the switch on the driver's door. If the light in the switch for blocking the rear power windows (located in the control panel in the driver's door) is lit, the rear door windows can only be operated from the driver's door. The windows in the rear doors are operated in the same way as the windows in the front doors.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

Interior rearview mirror

Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind.

Dipping

Control for dimming

Normal position

Dimmed position.

Automatic dimming*

Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1) is not available in mirrors with automatic dim- ming.

Interior rearview mirror with compass*

G 03 10 43

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW

(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

Calibrating the compass

G 03 10 45

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographical area to which the car was delivered. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones.

1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the engine running at idling speed.

2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec- onds. Following which, the character C is shown (the button is concealed so use a paper clip for example to press it in).

3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec- onds. The number for the current magnetic zone is displayed.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

78

4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the number for the required magnetic zone (1

15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic zones for the compass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C.

6. Following which, press and hold the button in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand drive cars and R for right-hand drive.

7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum speed of 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown on the display, which indicates that the calibration is complete.

G 02 01 50

Magnetic zones, Europe.

G 02 01 51

Magnetic zones, Asia.

G 02 01 52

Magnetic zones, South America.

G 02 01 53

Magnetic zones, Australia.

G 02 01 54

Magnetic zones, Africa.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Door mirrors

The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The rearview mirrors can be operated in key posi- tion I and II.

1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light on the button illumi- nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light goes out.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in key position I and II.

Retracting the mirrors

1. Press the L and R button at the same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat- ically stop in the fully retracted position.

WARNING

The door mirror on the driver's side is the wide-angled type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.

Folding out the mirrors

1. Press the L and R button at the same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat- ically stop in the fully extended position.

Automatic retracting/extending

When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control or using the Keyless-system, see page 130, the door mirrors are automati- cally retracted/extended.

NOTE

The door mirrors will not be extended auto- matically during unlocking if they were retracted using the controls in the door.

If the car is locked with the remote control and is then started, the door mirrors will still be extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Mirror fold on

locking, see page 84 for a description of the menu system.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset to the neutral position for electric retracting and extending to work.

1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir- rors.

2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R button. The mirrors are now reset to the neutral.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light* on the door mirrors illuminates when the approach lighting or home safe lighting is activated.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*

BLIS is an information system that under cer- tain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to vehicles moving in the same direc- tion in the so-called "blind spot", see page 175.

Water and dirt-repellent coating*

The front side windows are treated with a coating which improves the view

in poor weather conditions. For information on maintenance, see page 211.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. The water and dirt-repel- lent coating could be damaged.

02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

Open positions

G 00 75 03

The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi- tions:

Ventilation position, up at the rear edge

Sliding position, backwards/forwards

The remote control key must be in position I or II.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Switch off the supply to the power sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

G 02 92 22

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Opening, ventilation position

Closing, ventilation position

Ventilation position

Open:

Press the rear edge of the control (5) upward.

Close:

Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down- ward.

From ventilation position to fully open sunroof:

Pull the control rearward to the end posi- tion (1) and release.

Sliding position

Automatic operation

Pull the control past the point of resistance (2) to the rear end position (1) or past the point of resistance (3) to the forward end position (4) and release. The sunroof opens/closes completely.

Manual operation

Open:

Pull the control rearward to the point of resistance (2). The sunroof moves to maxi- mum open position as long as the button is kept depressed.

Close:

Press the control forward to the point of resistance (3). The sunroof moves to

02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

02

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

closed position as long as the button is kept depressed.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual closing.

Closing with remote control or lock button

G 02 01 57

One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows. The doors and the tailgate are locked.

If you need to interrupt closing:

Press the lock button again.

WARNING

Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the sunroof with the remote control. Always operate the sunroof with caution.

Sunscreen

The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto- matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it.

Pinch protection

The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti- vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automati- cally open to the previous position.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing, not dur- ing manual closing.

Make sure that nobody is in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the sunroof.

Wind deflector

The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position.

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

83

Possible settings

Personal preferences can be set for some of the car's functions. This applies to locks, cli- mate control and audio functions. For audio functions, see page 254.

Control panel

Control panel.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

Use

The settings are shown on the display (A).

Open the menu to enter settings:

1. Press MENU (B).

2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings with the navigation button (E).

3. Press ENTER (D).

4. Select an alternative with the navigation button (E).

5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.

Activated function is shown in the display with . Deactivated function is shown in the display with .

Close the menu:

Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec- ond.

Clock, adjustment

The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa- rately.

1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow up" or "arrow down" on the navigation but- ton (E).

2. Select the number for adjustment using "arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga- tion button.

3. Press ENTER to start the clock.

NOTE

If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow down" after the final minute number has been adjusted.

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust

The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in cars equipped with ECC:

Select from Low, Normal and High.

Recirculation timer

When the timer is active, the air recirculates for 3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air temperature.

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Select On/Off depending on whether or not you wish the recirculation timer to be active.

Reset all

Resets the climate function options to the fac- tory settings.

Car settings

Retract mirrors when locking*

When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control the door mirrors can be retrac- ted/extended automatically. The On/Off option is available.

Reduced guard*

The deadlocks function can be temporarily deactivated and the alarm level reduced if someone wishes to remain in the car and the doors have to be locked from the outside. The Activate once and Ask on exit options are available, see pages 135 and 139.

Unlock confirm. light

The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- back when the car is unlocked with the remote control. The On/Off option is available.

Lock confirm. light

The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- back when the car is locked with the remote control. The On/Off option is available.

Doors auto lock

When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the doors and tailgate can be locked automatically. The On/Off option is available. Pulling the door handle twice unlocks and opens the doors from the inside.

Doors unlock

There are two alternatives for unlocking:

All doors one press of the remote control unlocks all doors and the tailgate.

Driver door, then all one press of the remote control unlocks the driver's door. A second press then unlocks all doors and the tailgate.

Keyless entry*

All doors - all doors are unlocked simul- taneously.

Doors on same side front and rear doors on the same side are unlocked simultaneously.

Both front doors both front doors are unlocked simultaneously.

Any door any door or the tailgate can be unlocked separately.

Simultaneous closing/opening of all

windows

This function can be selected for the lock but- ton on the remote control and the front doors'

central locking button, as well as the outside door handle button on cars with the keyless system:

Auto. close all windows - all windows and the sunroof are closed simultaneously with one long press on the lock button.

This function can be selected for the unlock button on the remote control and the front doors' central locking button:

Auto. open all windows all windows are opened simultaneously with one long press on the unlock button.

Approach lighting

Select the time the car's lights should remain switched on when the approach lighting button is pressed - see page 126.

The following alternatives are available:

30 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Home safe lighting

Select the time the car's lights should remain on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled back after the remote control key has been removed - see page 64.

The following alternatives are available:

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

85

30 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Information

VIN number - (Vehicle Identification Number) is the car's unique identity num- ber.

Number of keys - The number of keys registered for the car is shown.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 03 00 70

HomeLink is a programmable remote control which can control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so replace their remote controls. HomeLink is supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.

The HomeLink panel consists of three pro- grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.

NOTE

HomeLink is designed not to work if the car is locked from the outside.

Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when switching to another car).

Delete the button programming when the car is to be sold.

Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars fitted with HomeLink . This may have an adverse effect on its function.

Operation

When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls.

Depress the programmed button to activate the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi- cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but- ton is kept depressed.

NOTE

If the ignition is not activated, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.

The original remote controls can of course be used in parallel with HomeLink .

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.

Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

Programming for the first time

The first step erases the memory in HomeLink and must not be carried out when only one individual button is being reprogram- med.

1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed.

2. Position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button for the original remote control and the button to be programmed on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has changed over from slow to rapid flash- ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-

ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button1" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.

Programming individual buttons

To reprogram an individual button, proceed in accordance with the following:

1. Depress the required button on HomeLink and do not release until step 3 has been completed.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.

The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button on the original remote control. The indicator lamp will start to flash. When the flashing has changed over from a slow to a rapid flashing - release both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.

Erasing programming

It is only possible to erase the programming for all the buttons on HomeLink , not for individual buttons.

Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. > HomeLink is now set in so-called

"learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed once more, see page 86.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

02 Instruments and controls

02

89

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on climate control................................................... 92 Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 94 Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 97 Air distribution....................................................................................... 100 Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*................................................... 101 Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)..................................................... 104

CLIMATE CONTROL

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

92

Air conditioning

The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. The car is equipped with either manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC, Electronic Climate Control).

NOTE

The air conditioning system can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible air in the passenger compartment and pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.

Misting windows

Remove misting on the insides of the windows by first using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win- dows with a normal window cleaning agent.

Ice and snow

Remove ice and snow from the climate control air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).

Fault tracing and repair

Volvo recommends that you only entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate control system to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Refrigerant

The air conditioning system contains R134a refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo- rine, which means that it is harmless to the ozone layer. The system must only be charged with R134a refrigerant, see also page 294. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out this work.

Passenger compartment filter

All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is only cleaned with one filter. This must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recom- mended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.

Display

There is a display above the climate control panel. This displays climate control settings.

Personal preferences

You can set preferences for two climate control functions:

Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to cars with ECC).

Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air.

For information about these settings, see page 83.

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

Air vents in the dashboard

G 01 99 42

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents towards the side windows to remove misting from the front side windows.

During cold weather - Close the centre vents for optimum comfort and best demisting.

ECC*

Actual temperature

The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor which detects the side from which the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the con- trols being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Sensor location

The sun sensor is on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is behind the climate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.

The humidity sensor is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Side windows and sunroof

To ensure that the air conditioning works sat- isfactorily, close all side windows and the sun- roof (if fitted).

Acceleration

The air conditioning system switches off tem- porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a temporary rise in temperature.

Condensation

In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

94

Control panel

Fan

Recirculation

Defroster

Air distribution

AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off

Heated front left seat

Heated front right seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature

Functions

1. Fan

Increase or decrease the fan speed by turning the knob.

If the knob is turned anticlock- wise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan and the air conditioning are

switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and OFF.

2. Recirculation

Recirculation can be used to shut out bad air, exhaust fumes, etc. from the passen- ger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated. No outside air is taken into the car. Recircu-

lation (together with the air conditioning sys- tem) cools the passenger compartment more quickly in hot weather. If the air in the car recir- culates for too long then there is a risk of the windows misting.

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

Timer

The timer function reduces the risk of icing, misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected). See page 83, for activating/deactivating the function. When the Defroster (3) program is selected, recirculation is deactivated.

3. Defroster

Used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the wind- screen and side windows. Air flows to the windows at high fan speed. The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.

The following also takes place when the defroster function is activated in order to pro- vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- ger compartment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button (5)

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

4. Air distribution

The airflow can be distributed to the windows, dashboard vents or floor by pressing the air distribution buttons.

A symbol on the display above the climate control

panel and an illuminated light in the relevant button indicate which function has been selected.

Refer to the table on page 100.

5. AC On/Off (ON/OFF)

ON: The air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the system's AUTO function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.

OFF: The air conditioning is off.

When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button). An illumi- nated lamp above ON and OFF respectively in the button shows the function selected.

6. and 7. Heated front seats*

Higher heat:

Press the button once both lights illumi- nate.

Lower heat:

Press the button once one light illumi- nates.

Heat off:

Press the button three times light not illu- minated.

8. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Heating is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door mir- rors. Press the button once to start simultaneous rear win- dow and rearview mirror defrosting. The function is

active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

The function is switched off manually or auto- matically. Switch off manually with one press

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

on the button. Automatic switching off discon- nects the rear window and door mirrors after 12 20 minutes depending on outside tem- perature.

During cold weather the defrosting* also con- tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear window and door mirrors free of ice and mist. The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted to the outside temperature. This function must be switched off manually.

9. Temperature

Select cooling or heating for both driver and passenger side.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Control panel

AUTO

Fan

Recirculation/Air quality system

Defroster

Air distribution

AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off

Heated front left seat

Heated front right seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature selector

Functions

1. AUTO

The AUTO function automat- ically regulates climate con- trol and maintains the selected temperature. The AUTO function controls heat- ing, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation, and air

distribution.

If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled auto- matically. All manual settings are switched off when AUTO is switched on. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.

2. Fan

Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO

is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically. The previously set fan speed is disengaged.

NOTE

If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan and the air conditioning are switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and OFF.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Recirculation

The function is selected to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passen- ger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when

this function is activated. If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist- ing on the insides of the windows.

Timer

The timer function reduces the risk of icing, misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected). To activate/deactivate the function see page 83.

NOTE

When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

3. Air quality system*

Same button as recirculation.

The air quality system consists of a multi-filter and a sensor. The filter separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment. When the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air intakes are closed and the air in the passenger compartment is recirculated. A green light (A) illuminates in the button when the air quality sensor is active.

Activating the air quality sensor:

Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality sensor (normal setting).

Or:

Switch between three functions by press- ing repeatedly the recirculation button.

Air quality sensor engaged the light (A) illuminates.

No recirculation engaged, provided it is not required for cooling in hot weather light not illuminated.

Recirculation engaged the light (M) illu- minates.

Keep the following in mind:

As a rule, the air quality sensor should always be engaged.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

The defroster functions for the front, side and rear windows can be used to demist the windows.

4. Defroster

Used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the wind- screen and side windows. Air flows to the windows at high fan speed. The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.

The following also takes place when the defroster function is activated in order to pro- vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- ger compartment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button (6)

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

5. Air distribution

The airflow can be distributed to the windows, dashboard vents or floor by pressing the air distribution buttons.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

A symbol on the display above the climate con- trol panel and an illuminated light in the relevant button indicate which function has been selected.

Refer to the table on page 100.

6. AC On/Off (ON/OFF)

ON: The air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the system's AUTO function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.

OFF: Off

When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button).

NOTE

The climate control system's demisting function with humidity sensor is significantly reduced with the air conditioning in deacti- vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually selected air distribution and fan speed.

7 and 8. Heated front seats*

To activate front seat heating:

Higher heat:

Press the button once both lights illumi- nate.

Lower heat:

Press the button once one light illumi- nates.

Heat off:

Press the button three times light not illu- minated.

9. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Heating is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door mir- rors. Press the button once to start simultaneous rear win- dow and rearview mirror defrosting. The function is

active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

The function is switched off manually or auto- matically. Switch off manually with one press

on the button. Automatic switching off discon- nects the rear window and door mirrors after 12 20 minutes depending on outside tem- perature.

During cold weather the defrosting* also con- tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear window and door mirrors free of ice and mist. The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted to the outside temperature. This function must be switched off manually.

10. Temperature selector

The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently.

Press the button once to acti- vate one side only. Press again to activate the other

side. Press the button a third time to activate both sides.

The active side is indicated by the button's light and in the display above the climate control panel.

When the car is started, the most recent setting is resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

03 Climate control

Air distribution

03

100

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:

Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.

to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dash- board air vents.

to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.

Air to windscreen and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.

to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate. (Not for low fan speed.)

Air to floor and from dash- board air vents.

in sunny weather with cool outside tempera- tures.

Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.

to ensure good com- fort in warm, dry weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.

to warm the feet.

Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents.

to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.

to provide cooler air for the feet or warmer air to the upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101

General information about heaters

The parking heater heats the engine and pas- senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.

At -10 C or lower the maximum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the petrol or diesel heater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Check on the information display that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows PARK HEAT ON.

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuel

If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the parking heater is switched off automatically and a message appears on the information display.

Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk READ button once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activating the heater

G 02 90 52

READ button

Thumbwheel1

RESET button1

Symbols and display messages

When one of the timer's settings or Direct start is activated, the infor- mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates and the information display shows an

explanatory text.

Display Specification

FUEL HEATER ON The heater is switched on and running.

TIMER IS SET FOR

FUEL HEATER

Reminder that the heater will start at the set time after the car has been left, when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch.

Display Specification

HEATER STOP-

PED LOW BAT-

TERY

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

HEATER STOP-

PED LOW FUEL

LEVEL

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as 50 km driving.

Direct start and immediate stop

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT

START PARK HEAT OFF or DIRECT

START PARK HEAT ON.

2. Long presses on the RESET button change between the two alternatives.

DIRECT START PARK HEAT ON: Parking heater switched on manually or with pro- grammed timer.

DIRECT START PARK HEAT OFF: Parking heater switched off.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

With the direct start of the heater it will be acti- vated for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.

Setting the timer

The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK

HEAT TIMER --:-- ON.

2. Give a long press (approx. 2 seconds) on the RESET button in order to access the flashing time setting.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with the thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way as TIMER 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heater

A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- ceed as follows:

1. Press the READ button.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT

TIMER 2.

The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.

The text OFF is shown with a constant glow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off in accordance with the instructions in the section "Direct start and immediate stop".

Clock/timer

The heater's time is connected to the car's clock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)

03

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Auxiliary heater (diesel)

In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may be required for achieving the correct tempera- ture in the engine and passenger compartment during cold weather.

The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on or off manually but is only controlled by the car's electronics.

When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

03 Climate control

03

105

106

Front seats............................................................................................ 108 Interior lighting...................................................................................... 111 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 114 Rear seat............................................................................................... 118 Cargo area............................................................................................ 120

INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

04

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seating position, manual seat

The driver's and passenger seats can be adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving positions.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- als. Check that the seat is locked after changing the position setting.

Raise/lower the front of the seat cushion (driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/ down.

Raise/lower the seat (driver's and passen- ger seat*), pump up/down.

Lumbar support1 (driver's and passenger seat*), turn the wheel.

Backrest rake: turn the wheel.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat and adjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before set- ting off, never while driving.

Check that the seat is locked in position.

Seating position, power seat*

G 02 01 99

The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con- trol key without the key being inserted into the ignition switch. The seat can always be adjusted in key position I or II.

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat, forwards/backwards

Seat, up/down

Backrest rake

An overload protection is deployed if one of the seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the ignition and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings can be adjusted at a time.

1 Also applies to power seat.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

Memory function

G 02 02 00

Buttons for memory function.

Store setting

1. Adjust seat.

2. Press and hold button M while pressing button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.

Using a stored setting

Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the seat stops. If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem- ory buttons in order to stop the seat.

WARNING

Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls.

Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment.

Ensure that none of the rear seat passen- gers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Memory in remote control key

The settings for the driver's seat are stored in the memory for the remote control key with which the car is locked. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the driver's seat adopts the stored settings when the driver's door is opened.

NOTE

The remote control key memory is inde- pendent of seat memory.

Tipping the front seat backrest*

The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.

1. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Adjust the backrest to an upright position 90 degrees.

3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest while folding it forwards.

4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Inlaid mats*

Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especially produced for your car.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111

Reading lamps and interior lighting

G 02 02 01

Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off

Interior lighting

Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on in key position I and II as well as when the engine is running. The lighting can also be activated within 30 minutes after:

the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

Front roof lighting

The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- sole.

Rear roof lighting

G 03 08 55

Reading lamps, rear.

Reading lamp left-hand rear, On/Off

Reading lamp right-hand rear, On/Off

The lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button.

Courtesy lighting

Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror*

G 02 02 10

The lamp is automatically switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting

Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

112

Cargo area lighting

The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Automatic lighting

Using the switch (2), see page 111, three posi- tions can be selected for the lighting the pas- senger compartment:

Off right-hand side (marked with 0) depressed, automatic lighting switched off.

Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated. The dimmer function is active.

On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.

Neutral position

When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas- senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the below.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade.

the engine is stopped and the remote con- trol key is turned to position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked with the key or remote control key.

Passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto- matically after 5 minutes.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

113

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

114

Storage spaces

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

Storage pocket on rear of front seats.

Storage compartment in door panel with cup holder.

Ticket clip

Storage pocket on front edge of front seat cushions.

Glovebox

Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs and cup holder,*) and storage compart- ment behind the centre console.

Bottle holder*

Coat hanger, only for light garments.

Storage compartment and cup holder.

Storage pocket* on front edge of centre rear seat cushion.

WARNING

Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Glovebox

G 02 42 08

The owner's manual and maps can be kept here for example. There are also holders for coins, pens and fuel cards.

The glovebox can be locked with the remote control key's detachable key blade. Further information is available on page 127.

Coat hanger

The coat hanger is located on the passenger seat head restraint. Only hang light garments on the hanger.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

116

Storage under the front armrest

G 01 83 71

There is a storage space under the armrest. There is also a smaller storage space in the detachable armrest. Press the small button and lift the armrest to open the shallow com- partment. Press the large button and lift the armrest to open the deeper compartment.

G 02 67 04

In the deeper compartment there is space for 10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have space.

Cup holder in centre console

G 01 83 72

There is space for a double cup holder under the roller cover. The space can be used for storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the rear edge of the cup holder where there is a recess.

If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front edge of the space and then press down the rear edge of the cup holder.

Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge from below and pulling forward.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

Storage compartment behind the gear lever

When there are no buttons for parking assis- tance and BLIS, see page 173 and page 175, the space can be used as a storage com- partment.

WARNING

Objects placed in the storage compart- ments must not obstruct the parking brake lever when it is applied.

Bottle holder*

G 01 74 41

A bottle holder for larger bottles is located on the rear of the tunnel console.

Ashtray*

G 01 96 22

An ashtray is located towards the rear of the tunnel console.

Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of the cover.

Emptying the ashtray:

1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustra- tion, and tilt the cover up.

2. Then lift the ashtray out.

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

118

Head restraint, rear

All head restraints can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be aligned with middle of the back of the head. Raise the head restraint as necessary.

To lower the head restraint, press the button by the right-hand pillar at the same time as push- ing down the head restraint. To remove the head restraint, the button by the right-hand pil- lar must be pressed while lifting out the head restraint.

Tipping the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

Lowering the backrest.

Rear edge of seat cushion

Lock catch

Lowering the backrest

Location of head restraint under seat cush- ion

IMPORTANT

The head restraints could be damaged if they are not removed for loading. The head restraint in the centre must also be removed for heavy loads.

G 02 07 90

The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwards together, or individually, to make it easier to transport long objects. To avoid damaging the seatbelts when folding the backrests up or down, these should be hooked onto the grab handles.

1. Hang the seatbelts on the hooks before lowering or raising the backrests.

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

119

2. Lift the rear edge of the seat cushion (1) to fold the seat cushions forward.

3. Pull the lock (2) catch up and forward to release the backrest. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

4. Fold the backrests (3) forward halfway and remove the head restraints on the outside seats. The centre seat's head restraint must be removed for a fully level floor.

5. Place the head restraints in the plastic sleeves on the undersides (4) of the raised seat cushions.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Remember to take down the seatbelts once you have raised the backrest.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Safety net*

G 02 07 68

The retractable safety net storage cassette is mounted on the rear of the backrest.

Using the safety net with raised

backrests.

1. Pull out the safety net horizontally back- ward. Extend the right hand attachment and hold it extended. Insert the attachment into the rear keyed notch in the roof panel. Then press the attachment forward to the front notch. The attachment must be pressed so far that the flange rides over the restriction between the front and rear notches.

2. Do the same on the other side. The attach- ments on the net spring shut. Pull the net over towards the left bracket to fit it in place.

3. Check that the attachments on the safety net are securely fastened in the keyed recesses in the roof panel.

Using the safety net with lowered

backrests

The safety net can also be used when the back- rests are lowered. In this case, use the front attachment points in the roof panel.

Removing the safety net

1. Pull one of the net's attachments rearward to the large notch and pull it out.

2. Detach the other attachment in the same way.

Removing the safety net storage

cassette.

1. Lower the entire backrest.

2. Press the cassette outward to release it from the mounting brackets.

WARNING

Loads in the cargo area must be firmly secured even if the safety net is correctly fitted.

Safety grille*

G 01 47 30

The safety grille is designed to help prevent loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sud- den braking. For safety reasons, the grille must always be correctly fastened and secured.

Folding up

If the safety grille is in the way it can be folded up to the roof:

1. Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille.

2. Pull straight backward and upward. Then release. The gas struts prevent the grille from dropping down.

To fold down the grille, do the reverse.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

Removing

Remove the safety grille as follows:

1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward slightly (to relieve the load from the gas struts).

2. Remove the caps from the nuts on either side that secure the safety grille.

3. Unscrew the nuts until the threads are flush with the edge of the nuts.

4. Turn the grille backward in the car slightly to release it from the trim. Do not angle the grille too much as it can become wedged, making it difficult to pull out.

5. Repeat for the other mounting and then carefully lift the grille out of the car.

Attaching

To fit the safety grille:

1. Follow the instructions in the reverse order.

2. Tighten the two nuts to 24 Nm.

In the event of uncertainty about attaching or removing the safety grille, consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Cargo cover*

G 02 07 66

Cargo cover.

Fitting the cargo cover.

Fit the cargo cover as follows:

1. Move the front section of the cargo cover backwards/over the cassette.

2. Following which, fit the cargo cover in its tracks along the side panels, furthest into the cargo area.

3. Push the button forward so that the catches are retracted. Following which, press the cargo cover down in the track.

4. The button springs back when the cargo cover is correctly located.

5. Repeat the procedure on the opposite side.

G 02 07 67

6. Check that the cargo cover is fitted firmly in the cargo area.

7. Fit the front section of the cargo cover in the wedge shaped tracks on the side pan- els, against the rear seat.

8. The cargo cover is now ready for use.

WARNING

Do not place objects on the cargo cover or on its front section.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Use

Pull the cargo cover over the cargo area and hook it into the tracks in the rear pillars in the cargo area.

Removing the cargo cover.

1. Lift up the front section of the cargo cover, move it backwards and then allow it to hang free.

2. Move the button forwards, lift up one end of the cargo cover. Repeat on the opposite side. Following which, pull out the cargo cover.

Using the safety net together with the cargo cover

G 02 07 69

1. Tip the backrests slightly forward to access the safety net cassette. Start with the 40% section.

2. Extend the safety net rearward.

3. Fold the backrests back up.

4. Hook the net into the attachment points in the roof panel as described for raised backrests.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

Load retaining eyelets*

G 01 47 57

The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps or nets to anchor items in the cargo area.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

Electrical socket in cargo area*

Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket. This socket works regardless of whether or not the ignition is on.

NOTE

Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.

Bag holder*

G 01 47 56

The bag holder holds shopping bags in place and prevents them from tipping over and spill- ing their contents in the cargo area.

1. Open the hatch in the cargo area.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key with key blade....................................................... 126 Active locks........................................................................................... 129 Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 130 Battery in remote control key................................................................ 133 Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 134 Child safety locks.................................................................................. 137 Alarm*.................................................................................................... 138

LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

126

Remote control key

The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys.

The remote control keys contain detachable metal key blades for mechanical locking/ unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.

The key blades' unique code is available at authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended for ordering new key blades.

A maximum of 6 remote control keys/key blades can be programmed and used for one single car.

Turn signal indication during locking/ unlocking

When the car is unlocked using the remote control key or Keyless drive system, two short flashes of the direction indicators serve to indi- cate that unlocking was correctly performed.

For locking, the indication takes place with one long flash and only if all locks are locked, after the doors and the tailgate have been closed.

Personal preferences in the menu system can be used to the deactivate indication via the direction indicators. There will then be no visual indication as to whether the lock status is cor- rect, see page 84.

Loss of a remote control key

If you lose a remote control key, take the car and the other remote control keys to a Volvo workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.

Immobiliser

The remote control keys are fitted with coded chips. The code must be accepted by the reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The engine can only be started if the correct remote control key with the correct code is used.

Remote control key functions

G 01 94 02

Locking Locks all doors and the tailgate. Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also close the side windows and the sunroof.

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

Unlocking Unlocks the doors and the tailgate. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also open the side windows.

Approach lighting Switches on the light- ing at a distance lights up the area around a car parked in a dark location. Press the button once to switch on the interior light- ing, position/parking lamps, number plate lighting and door mirror lamps (option). The lighting is switched off automatically after 30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information on setting the delay time, see page 84.

Tailgate Press the button once to unlock the tailgate only1.

Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the red button for at least 3 seconds or press i t twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The alarm can be deactivated with the same button, after having been armed for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 30 sec- onds.

IMPORTANT

The narrow section of the remote control key is particularly sensitive - this contains the chip. The engine cannot be started if the chip is damaged.

Detachable key blade

G 01 94 03

Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see page 131.

access to the glovebox can be blocked,see page 128.

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated, see page 137.

PACOS* activated/deactivated, see page 22.

Removing the key blade

To remove the key blade from the remote con- trol key:

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

Pull out the key blade at the same time.

Attaching the key blade

Be careful when inserting the key blade into the remote control key.

1. Hold the remote control key with the nar- row end pointing down and lower the key blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in position. You should hear a "click".

1 The function unlocks the boot lid it does not open.

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

128

Unlocking doors with the key blade

If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the driver's door can be unlocked and opened as follows:

1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door keyhole.

2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and open the door.

See also the figure and further information on page 131.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 139.

Locking the glovebox

G 02 00 34

The glovebox is locked.

The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key blade. (For information on the key blade, see page 127.)

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlocking takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

The remote control key cannot unlock the glovebox without the key blade.

This function is particularly useful for when the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.

05 Locks and alarm

Active locks

05

129

G 01 94 50

Active locks for remote control key with

key blade.

Active locks for remote control key with-

out key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless lock and ignition system

G 01 94 51

Keyless function range

The keyless drive system allows the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key. You simply need to have the remote control key with you in a pocket or a bag.

The system makes it easier and more conven- ient to open the car, for example with shopping bags in one hand and a child in the other. It saves you having to take out or look for the remote control key.

The two remote control keys incorporate the keyless drive function. You can order addi- tional remote controls. The keyless drive sys- tem can handle up to six remote controls.

Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the

car

In order to open a door or the tailgate, a remote control key must be no more than approx. 1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate.

This means that the person who wishes to open a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to open a door if the remote control key is on the other side of the car.

The grey area in the illustration indicates the range covered by the system's antennas.

If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless drive remote control key with them, a warning message appears on the information display and a reminder signal sounds. The warning message disappears when the remote control key is brought back to the car or when the igni- tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning is only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or II after someone has opened and closed a door.

The warning message and reminder signal dis- appear when the remote control key is brought back to the car after one of the following actions:

a door has been opened and closed

the ignition dial has been turned to position 0

the READ button has been pressed.

Never leave any remote control key in the

car

If a remote control key with keyless drive func- tion is left in the car, it is made passive when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.

If someone breaks into the car and finds the remote control key, it can be activated and used again. It is therefore important to handle all remote control keys with equal care.

Interference to remote control key

function

Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- fere with the keyless drive system.

NOTE

Do not place/store the remote control key near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key and key blade in the normal way, see page 126.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

Locking

G 02 00 33

Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.

When the remote control key is within the range covered by the system's antennas, the doors and the tailgate are locked as follows:

Push in the lock button on one of the door handles.

All doors must be closed before the lock button is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.

When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the inside of the doors retract.

NOTE

On cars with the keyless drive system and automatic transmission the gear selector must be moved to the P position and the ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other- wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.

Unlocking

When the remote control key is within the range covered by the system's antennas:

1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han- dle.

2. Open the tailgate by pressing under the tailgate opening button and lift the tailgate.

If for some reason the keyless drive function in the remote control key is not operating, the car can be unlocked using the remote control key functions, see page 126.

Power seat remote control key with

memory function

If several people with keyless drive remote control keys get into the car, then the driver's seat will be adjusted for the person who opens the door first.

Unlocking doors with the key blade

G 02 02 25

If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the driver's door can be opened as follows:

1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out the plastic cover in the handle by inserting the key blade in the hole on the bottom of the cover.

2. Unlock the door using the key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 139.

Antenna location

G 02 00 74

The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car:

Rear bumper, inside centre

Door handle, left-hand rear

Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

Door handle, right-hand rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.

Personal preferences

The Keyless Drive system can have personal preferences applied, see page 84.

05 Locks and alarm

Battery in remote control key

05

133

Low battery in remote control key

When the battery runs down and full function- ality cannot be guaranteed, the information symbol and display show KEY BATTERY

LOW VOLTAGE or REMOTE BATTERY

LOW VOLTAGE.

Changing the remote control key battery

G 01 94 06

If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals from the remote control key at a normal dis- tance, the battery should be replaced (type CR 2450, 3 V).

1. Place the remote control key with the key- pad downward and prize up the cover using a small screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and () sides are fitted (there is a diagram under the cover).

4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers.

5. Refit the cover and press it in. > Dispose of the old battery in an environ-

mentally-responsible manner.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Locking/unlocking the car from outside

For cars with the Keyless system, see page 130.

Unlocking

Using the remote control key's unlock button the car can be unlocked in two different ways (select in personal settings, see page 84):

One press unlocks the doors and the tail- gate

One press unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the tailgate.

Locking

The remote control key's lock button locks the doors and tailgate simultaneously.

NOTE

The car can be locked even if the tailgate is open - when the tailgate is then closed there is a risk that the keys will be locked in*.

WARNING

Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not pos- sible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. Read more about this in the section "Deadlocks" later on.

Rapid closing

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) on the remote control key's lock button to close all windows and sunroof* at the same time.

Tailgate

Unlocking

Unlocking tailgate only:

Press the remote control key's button to unlock the tailgate.

Locking

If the doors are locked when the tailgate is closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the remote control key's lock button or from inside with the central locking button in order to lock both doors and the tailgate.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically (does not apply to locking from inside). This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see page 139.)

Locking/unlocking the car from inside

G 00 74 51

With the central locking button on the driver's door, the doors and tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously.

Unlocking

A door cannot be unlocked by pulling up its lock button.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135

Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button .

Global opening

Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button .

A long press (at least 4 seconds) also opens all the side windows simultaneously - for example, to quickly ventilate the pas- senger compartment during hot weather.

Locking

Press the lower section of the central lock- ing button .

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also close all windows and the sunroof* at the same time.

All doors can be locked with each respective door's lock button.

Opening the doors

When the doors are locked from the inside:

Pull the handle twice to unlock and open the door.

Automatic locking

When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the doors and tailgate are locked automatically.

When the function is activated and the doors have been locked they can be opened in two ways:

Pull one of the door handles twice

Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button and pull the door handle.

The function can be activated/deactivated by means of personal preferences, see page 84.

Deadlocks*1

When deadlocked, the doors cannot be opened from the inside if they are locked with the remote control key.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after a 10-25 second delay after the doors have been locked.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The driver's door can also be unlocked manually with the remote control key's detachable key blade - see page 127.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

Temporary deactivation

If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off.

1 Only in combination with alarm.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

Deactivation is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under CAR

SETTINGS (for a detailed description of the menu system, see page 84).

2. Select REDUCED GUARD.

3. Select Activate once: The instrument panel display shows the message REDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is turned to position 0 the audio system dis- play shows the message Reduced guard

ask on exit Press ENTER to reduce

guard until engine is started Press EXIT

to cancel - select one of the options:

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car. Note that the alarm's* movement and tilt detec- tors are switched off at the same time, see page 139.

The next time the remote control key is turned to key position II the system is reset to zero and the instrument panel display shows the mes- sage FULL GUARD at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are re-engaged.

or

If the locking system shall not be changed: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.

05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

Manual select, child lock, rear doors

G 01 46 97

Manual child lock in left-hand rear door.

The door cannot be opened from inside.

The door can be opened from inside.

The child safety lock controls are found on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.

To activate or deactivate the child safety locks:

1. Remove the remote control key's key blade.

2. Turn the control using the key blade.

Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows*

Driver's door control panel.

When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driv- er's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

1. Child safety locks are activated in key posi- tion I or II.

2. Press the switch on the driver's door.

A message appears on the information dis- play.

The lamp in the button illuminates when the lock is active.

NOTE

Cars with electric child safety locks do not also have manual child locks.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alarm system

When the alarm is armed, it continually moni- tors all alarm inputs.

The alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens

a non-approved key is used in the ignition or if an attempt is made to force the lock

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector)

the battery's cable is disconnected

anyone tries to disconnect the siren.

Alarm indicator

G 02 02 27

A red LED on the top of the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit the alarm is not armed.

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed.

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until key position II is activated the alarm has been triggered.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message appears on the display. At which point you should contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.

Arming the alarm

Press the remote control key lock button. A long flash from the car's direction indi- cators confirms that the alarm is armed and that the doors are locked.

IMPORTANT

The alarm is fully armed when the car's direction indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second.

Disarming the alarm

Press the remote control key unlock but- ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc- tion indicators confirm that the alarm is disarmed and that the doors are unlocked.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139

Automatic re-arming of the alarm

This function prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Deactivating a triggered alarm

Press the unlock button on the remote control key or insert the key in the ignition switch.

Confirmation is given by two short flashes from the direction indicators.

If the remote control key's batteries are dis- charged then the alarm can be deactivated by unlocking the driver's door manually, inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and turning it to key position II.

Remote control key not working

G 01 94 20

If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is discharged - the car can be unlocked, dis- armed and the engine started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade. The alarm is triggered and the siren sounds.

2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First remove the knob by pressing in the catch (1) and pulling out (2).

3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote control key is turned to key position II.

Alarm signals

When the alarm is triggered, the following hap- pens:

A siren sounds for 25 seconds or until the alarm is deactivated. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

Reduced alarm level

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - the move- ment and tilt detectors should be temporarily deactivated.

The procedure is the same as with the tempo- rary disengaging of deadlocks - see page 135

Testing the alarm system

Testing the movement detector* in the

passenger compartment

1. Open all the windows.

2. Engage the alarm function with the remote control key's lock button. Active alarm function is confirmed with a slowly flashing alarm indicator.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Test the movement detector by lifting out a bag from a seat for example. > A siren should sound and all direction

indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

Test of alarm for doors

1. Engage the alarm function with the remote control key's lock button.

2. Please wait 30 seconds.

3. Unlock the driver's door with the detacha- ble key blade.

4. Open one of the doors. > A siren should sound and all direction

indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

Test of alarm for bonnet

1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement detector, see the previous section "Reduced alarm level".

2. Remain sitting in the car and engage the alarm function with the remote control key's lock button.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the dashboard. > A siren should sound and all direction

indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

05 Locks and alarm

05

141

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 144 Refuelling.............................................................................................. 146 Alcolock*............................................................................................... 150 Starting the engine................................................................................ 154 Starting the engine Flexifuel............................................................... 156 Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 158 Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 159 Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 160 DRIVe Start-Stop*................................................................................. 165 Brake system........................................................................................ 169 DSTC Stability and traction control system*...................................... 171 Park Assist*........................................................................................... 173 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 175 Towing and recovery............................................................................. 178 Start assistance.................................................................................... 181 Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 182 Towing equipment*............................................................................... 184 Detachable towbar* ............................................................................. 186 Loading................................................................................................. 190 Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 191

STARTING AND DRIVING

06 Starting and driving

General

06

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Economical driving

Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.

Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption.

Avoid driving with open windows.

Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.

Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.

Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Cars with the D2 engine and 6-speed man- ual transmission with Start/Stop* are started in 2nd gear under normal condi- tions on level ground.

For more information and further advice, see the pages 13 and 298.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

Driving in water

The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In greater depths, water can enter the trans- mission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.

When driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the

brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

IMPORTANT

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions.

In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Tow the car from the water.

Engine, gearbox and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For supplementary information about over- heating when driving with a trailer - see page 182.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

In the event of a risk of overheating a built- in protection function in the gearbox is acti- vated which, amongst other things, illumi- nates the instrument panel's yellow infor- mation lamp and there is a text message

06 Starting and driving

General

06

145

displayed there regarding appropriate action - follow the recommendation given.

If the temperature gauge for the engine's cooling system goes into the red zone - stop and let the engine idle for a few minutes.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off.

Diesel engine

When driving under heavy load in a hot climate, the engine cooling fan can be replaced with one of a greater capacity than the standard model1. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer regarding the options for your car.

Open tailgate

WARNING

Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Do not overload the battery

The electrical functions in the car load the bat- tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the remote control key in key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power.

Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area supplies power even when the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch.

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume)

headlamps.

If the battery voltage is low the information dis- play shows the text LOW BATTERY POWER

SAVE MODE. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the battery by star- ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

Slippery driving conditions

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

1 For certain engines.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

146

Opening the fuel filler flap

Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater before refuelling!

Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the lighting panel, see page 61. The engine must be switched off before the flap can be opened. The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.

Closing

Push in the flap until you hear a click.

Fuel cap

1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis- tance is felt.

2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a stop.

3. Take out the cap.

4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

NOTE

Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling. Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.

Filling up with fuel

Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Fuel of a lower quality than that specified should not be used as engine power and fuel consumption could be negatively affected, for more information see the following section Fuel.

General information on fuel

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- ting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal- lowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills on to the ground can be ignited by the exhaust fumes.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

147

IMPORTANT

Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).

For information on fuel consumption, CO2

emissions and tank volume - see page 298.

Catalytic converter

The purpose of the catalytic converter is to purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of exhaust gases close to the engine so that it quickly reaches operating temperature. The catalytic converter consists of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- ical reaction without being used up them- selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor

The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that con-

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion of harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata- lytic converter.

Petrol

Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 91, 95 and 98 RON.

91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.

Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.

Bioethanol E85

Do not modify the fuel system or its compo- nents, and do not replace components with parts that are not specifically designed for use with bioethanol.

WARNING

Methanol must not be used. A decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct alternative fuel.

The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury or engine damage.

Reserve fuel can

The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol, see the NOTE box, page 156.

IMPORTANT

Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely fastened and that its cap is sealed.

WARNING

Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

148

Diesel

Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used: special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality.

At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil

companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- cipitate.

IMPORTANT

Use special winter grade fuel during cold months.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.

IMPORTANT

The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

Empty tank

The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling.

Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- vation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the

engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and turn to key position II (see page 154).

2. Wait approx. 1 minute. 3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/

or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control key to start position III.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter

The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF)

Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil- ter, which results in more efficient emission control. The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. So-

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- ically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.

The rear window heating may be activated automatically to increase the load on the engine during regeneration without warning.

Regeneration in cold weather

If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow information symbol on the instrument panel illuminates, and the message SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL is shown on the instrument panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motor- way. The car should then be driven for approx- imately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration.

When regeneration is complete the message is cleared automatically.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up it may be incapable of functioning. Then it can be difficult to start the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.

06 Starting and driving

Alcolock*

06

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on the Alcolock

The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.

WARNING

The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.

Functions

1. Nozzle for breath test. 2. Switch. 3. Transmission button. 4. Lamp for battery status. 5. Lamp for result of breath test. 6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

Operation

Battery

Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- tus:

Indicator lamp (4)

Battery status

Green flashing Charging in pro- gress

Green Fully charged

Yellow Semi-charged

Red Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.

NOTE

Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.

1 Also called Alcoguard.

06 Starting and driving

Alcolock*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Before starting the engine

The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.

1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use.

2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).

3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath

test. 4. If no message is shown then the transmis-

sion to the car may have failed - in which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.

5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.

6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.

Result after breath test

Indicator lamp (5) + Display text

Specification

Green lamp + ALCOGUARD

APPROVED TEST

Start the engine - no alcohol content measured.

Yellow lamp + ALCOGUARD

APPROVED TEST

Engine starting pos- sible - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.

Red lamp + DISAP-

PROVED TEST

WAIT 1 MINUTE

Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.

A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply. See also the section entitled General information on the Alcolock on page150.

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.

To bear in mind

Before the breath test

In order to obtain correct function and as accu- rate a measurement result as possible:

Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.

Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.

Change of driver

In order to ensure that a new breath test is car- ried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.

Calibration and service

The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop2 every 12 months.

30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows ALCOGUARD CALIBR.

REQUIRED. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine star- ting will be blocked - only starting with the

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

06 Starting and driving

Alcolock*

06

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Bypass function will then be possible, see page 152 section Emergency situation.

The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- pears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the mes- sage permanently.

Cold or hot weather

The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:

Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-

onds)

+10 to +85 10

-5 to +10 60

-40 to -5 180

At temperatures below -20 C or above +60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The display shows ALCOGUARD

INSERT POWER CABLE. In which case, con- nect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.

In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.

Emergency situation

In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.

NOTE

All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see page 10 in the section, Recording data.

After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS

ENABLED the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop2.

The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.

When the Alcolock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop2.

Activating the Bypass function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows BYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE

and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS

ENABLED - after which the engine can be started.

This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop2.

Activating the Emergency function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED and the engine can be started.

This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop2.

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

06 Starting and driving

Alcolock*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

Symbols and display messages

In addition to the previously described mes- sages, the combined instrument panel's dis- play can also show the following:

Display text Meaning/Action

ALCOGUARD

RESTART POSSI-

BLE

The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine starting pos- sible without new test.

ALCOGUARD

SERVICE

REQUIRED

Contact a work- shop2.

ALCOGUARD NO

SIGNAL

Transmission failed - send manually with button (3) or take a new breath test.

ALCOGUARD

INVALID TEST

Test failed - take a new breath test.

ALCOGUARD

BLOW LONGER

Blowing too short - blow for longer.

ALCOGUARD

BLOW SOFTER

Blowing too hard - blow more gently.

Display text Meaning/Action

ALCOGUARD

BLOW HARDER

Blowing too weak - blow harder.

ALCOGUARD

WAIT PREHEAT-

ING

Heating not finished - wait for text ALCOGUARD

BLOW 5 SEC-

ONDS.

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

06

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Before starting the engine

Apply the parking brake.

Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started, see page 150.

Automatic gearbox

Move the gear selector in position P or N.

Manual gearbox

Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch pedal fully depressed. This is particularly important in very cold conditions.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossi- ble to steer the car.

The remote control key must be in key posi- tion II when the car is being towed.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is in order that the emis- sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Starting the engine

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.

Petrol

Turn the remote control key to key position III. If the engine does not start within 510 seconds, release the key and try again.

Diesel

1. Turn the remote control key to key position II. > An indicator symbol in the combined

instrument panel shows that engine pre- heating is underway, see page 53.

2. Turn the ignition key to position III when the indicator symbol goes out.

Autostart *

With the autostart function, there is no need to hold the remote control key (or ignition dial, on cars with Keyless Drive - see page 130) in key position III until the engine has started.

Turn the key to key position III and release it - the starter motor then works automati- cally until the engine has started.

NOTE

If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold without waiting for engine preheating, then the automatic start sequence can be delayed for a couple of seconds.

Key positions

0 Locked position

The steering lock is activated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

06

155

I Radio position

Steering lock deactivated. Certain functions can be used. The engine's electrical system is not activated.

II Driving position

The remote control key's position when driving. The whole electrical system is engaged.

III Start position

The starter motor is activated. The remote control key is released when the engine has started and then springs back to drive position.

A ticking sound can be heard if the key reaches an intermediate position - in which case, turn the key to position II and back to get rid of the sound.

When the steering lock is activated

If the front wheels are positioned so that there is tension in the steering lock then the infor- mation display may show a warning message

and the car cannot be started. In which case, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch and turn the steering wheel so that the tension is released.

2. Hold the steering wheel in this position. Reinsert the key and make a new attempt to start the car.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock would be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car.

Remote control keys and electronic immobiliser

The remote control key must not hang with other keys or metal objects on the same key ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti- vated accidentally.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine Flexifuel

06

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information about starting with Flexifuel

The engine is started in the same way as in a petrol-engined car, see page 154.

NOTE

The immobiliser is activated in the event of repeated start attempts. Before a new start attempt is made the key/dial must first be turned back to position I or 0.

In the event of starting difficulties

If the engine does not start at the first start attempt, proceed as follows:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2.

2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to key position III.

3. When the engine has started, ease the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine speed increases.

If the engine has not started after

10 seconds, second attempt

Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to key position III until the engine starts, but not longer than 60 seconds.

If the engine still does not start

Please wait for one minute, fully depress the accelerator pedal and repeat the pre- vious procedure.

IMPORTANT

If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Engine block heater*

Electrical input to the engine block heater.

When the temperature is expected to be lower than 10 C and the car has been refuelled with

bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick starting of the engine.

The lower the temperature, the longer the time required with the engine block heater. At -20 C the heater should be used for approx. 3 hours.

Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre- heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For this reason you should aim to use the engine block heater throughout the winter months.

WARNING

The engine block heater is powered by high voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec- tric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine Flexifuel

06

157

NOTE

Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel:

In the event of stalling due to an empty fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.

For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol E85 fuel, see page 147.

Fuel adaptation

If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice versa) then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor- tant to allow the engine to accustom itself (adapt) to the new fuel mixture.

Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed.

IMPORTANT

After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or discon- nected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared.

06 Starting and driving

Keyless drive*

06

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 01 94 10

The keyless drive system allows the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key, see page 130.

The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the same way as the remote control key. One pre- condition for starting the car is that the car's remote control key is located inside the pas- senger compartment or the cargo area.

Starting the car

Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto- matic gearbox).

Petrol engine

Press in and turn the ignition dial to key position III.

Diesel engine

1. First turn the ignition dial to key position II and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel goes out, see page 53.

2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to position III.

Starting with the remote control key

G 01 94 20

If the remote control key's battery is dis- charged then the Keyless Drive function does not work. In which case, start the car by using the remote control key as ignition dial.

1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.

2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition switch.

3. Insert the remote control key into the igni- tion switch and start in the same way as with the ignition dial.

06 Starting and driving

Manual gearbox

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

Gear positions

Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.

The 6-speed box is available in two versions - reverse gear position differs between them. Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

WARNING

Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - an engaged gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.

Gear shift indicator - GSI*

GSI - Gear Shift Indicator - advises the driver of the opti- mum time to change gear. The indication is given with an arrow for up and down shift- ing respectively in the lower information display of the

combined instrument panel, see page 51.

Reverse gear inhibitor

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta- tionary.

NOTE

With the upper variant of the shifting pattern for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra- tion) - first press down the gear lever in the N position in order to engage reverse gear.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

160

Geartronic automatic gear positions

G 01 82 64

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear positions.

The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica- tions: P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see page 51.

P Parking position

Select position P when you wish to start the engine or park the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from the P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Always apply the parking brake when parking the car.

WARNING

Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.

R Reverse

The car must be stationary when position R is selected.

N Neutral

No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake when the car is stationary with the gear selector in posi- tion N.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from the N position if the car has been stationary for more than 3 seconds.

D Drive

D is the normal driving position. The car auto- matically shifts up and down depending on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.

Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-)

The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at +/. The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 6, which is equivalent to the gear that is engaged just then, see page 51.

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release it, the lever returns to its rest position between + and .

or

Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode (+/) can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

161

a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

Move the lever to the side to the end posi- tion at D.

Kick-down

When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- tion.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 02 02 37

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor

Cars with an automatic gearbox have special safety systems:

Keylock

To remove the remote control key, the gear selector must be in the P position. The key is locked in all other positions.

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

Hold your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- tion.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking

position (P position)

To be able to move the gear selector from the P position to other gear positions, the remote control key must be in position II and the brake pedal must be depressed.

Shiftlock Neutral (N position)

If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least three sec- onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- ning) then the gear selector is locked in the N position.

To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote con- trol key must be in position II.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor

G 01 82 63

In certain cases, it may be necessary to move the car when it is not driveable, for example if the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move the car:

1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear edge.

2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote control key.

3. Hold the key blade down and at the same time move the gear lever out of the P posi- tion.

Cold start

When starting in low temperatures, the gear changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera- tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear- box shifts up later than normal when the engine is started at low temperatures.

NOTE

Depending on the engine temperature when the engine is started, the idle speed after a cold start may be higher than normal for certain engine types.

Automatic gearbox Powershift*

G 01 82 64

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear positions.

Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox. A conventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter instead that trans- fers power from engine to gearbox.

Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri- bed in the previous section.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis- sion, this can be verified by checking the des-

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

163

ignation on the decal number (5) under the bonnet - see page 286. The designa- tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift trans- mission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.

To bear in mind

The transmission's double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time.

Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu- minates and the information display shows a message. The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or

slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission cools down when the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.

Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.

IMPORTANT

Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox could then overheat.

For important information regarding Powershift transmission and towing - see page 178.

Text message and action

In some situations the display can show a mes- sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi- nated.

The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the gearbox become too hot. In parallel with the display text the driver is also advised that the car's elec- tronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions on the information display where appropriate.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

164

Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action

TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO

HOLD

Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con- stant engine speed.

Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station- ary using the foot brakeA.

TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immedi- ately in a safe manner.

TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN No drive due to overheated gearbox. Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the mes- sage clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

NOTE

The table's examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten- tionally to prevent damage to one of the car's components.

WARNING

If a warning symbol combined with the text TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmis- sion between engine and gearbox is tem- porarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox tem- perature has cooled to an acceptable level.

For more possible display messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission, see page 56.

A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button.

06 Starting and driving

DRIVe Start-Stop*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

General

Quieter and cleaner

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values and it influences all of our operations. This target-orientation has resulted in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept consists of an interaction between several sep- arate energy-saving functions, all with the common purpose of reducing fuel consump- tion, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust emissions.

Start/Stop

In addition to being equipped with a reliable and fuel-efficient diesel engine, this car's engine is equipped with a Start and Stop func- tion which comes into action in the event of e.g. stationary traffic queues or waiting at traffic lights - see the detailed description on the next page.

The engine's automatic restart sequence runs so smoothly that it is hardly noticeable that the engine has actually been switched off. The experience is that the engine has been running the whole time but with an extremely quiet and low idling speed.

The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally conscious driving style by means of being able to disengage gear and letting the engine auto- stop, whenever appropriate.

Smart charging

The car's kinetic energy is used during engine braking by means of it being converted into electricity and stored in the car's battery.

Adapted power steering

Another DRIVe function is that the power steer- ing's energy take-off is adapted according to requirements. By means of optimisation and the introduction of an energy saving function the energy take-off can be minimised on occa- sions where power assistance (help in turning the steering wheel) is not necessary.

Aerodynamics

The DRIVe concept also includes a lowered chassis, front and rear spoilers with low wind resistance, as well as specially developed wheel rims1.

1 The range varies depending on the market.

06 Starting and driving

DRIVe Start-Stop*

06

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function and operation

On/Off button and display text AUTO START- STOP ON.

The Start/Stop system is activated automati- cally when the engine is started with the key. The driver is made aware of this function by means of the On/Off button's green lamp being illuminated.

NOTE

After starting with the key and each auto- stop the car must first reach 5 km/h before the automatic Start/Stop function is re-acti- vated - following which certain conditions must also be fulfilled, refer to these under the heading "The engine does not auto- stop".

All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even with an auto- stopped engine, except that some equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.

Auto-stopping the engine

In order for the engine to stop automatically the car must be stationary - however, the Start/Stop function does accept slow rolling, the equivalent to normal walking pace:

Set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automatically.

The display text ENGINE IN

AUTO START, and the but- ton's illuminated green lamp, reminds - and indicates - that the engine has been auto- stopped.

Auto-starting the engine

With the gear lever in neutral position:

Depress the clutch pedal - the engine starts automatically.

or

Depress the accelerator pedal - the engine starts automatically.

On a downhill gradient there is also the option to start the engine automatically as follows:

Release the foot brake and allow the car to move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.

After starting the engine:

Engage a suitable gear and continue the journey.

Gear indicator

An essential detail in connection with environ- mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in time.

The driver is assisted by an indicator which notifies the driver when it is most advan- tageous to engage the next higher or lower gear - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator).

06 Starting and driving

DRIVe Start-Stop*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

Indication is made with an up or down arrow in the combined instrument panel's lower dis- play.

Deactivating the Start/Stop function

The information display shows here that the Start/ Stop function has been disengaged.

In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out by pressing this button once, at which point the button's lamp goes out.

Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated by a message appearing on the information dis- play for about 5 seconds.

The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.

Limitations

The engine does not auto-stop

Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not auto-stop if:

the driver has opened the seatbelt's buckle.

the car has not stopped completely.

the car has been reversed and reverse gear is disengaged.

the engine does not have normal operating temperature.

outside temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 30 C.

the environment in the passenger com- partment differs from the preset values - indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed.

the capacity of the battery is below the minimum permissible level.

battery temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 55 C.

The engine auto-starts without driver

intervention

An auto-stopped engine may restart in some cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue. In the following cases the engine auto-starts even if the driver

has not depressed the clutch pedal in order to engage a gear:

The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened.

Misting forms on the windows.

The outside temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 30 C.

There is a temporarily high current take-off or battery capacity has dropped below the lowest permissible level.

The car starts to roll - faster than the equiv- alent normal walking pace.

Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

WARNING

Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. In order to avoid starting automatically with raised bonnet:

Engage a gear and apply the parking brake.

The engine does not auto-start

In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped:

The driver's seatbelt buckle has been opened - a display text prompts the driver to start the engine normally.

A gear is engaged without declutching - a display text prompts the driver to set the

06 Starting and driving

DRIVe Start-Stop*

06

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

gear lever in neutral position in order to enable auto-start.

Involuntary engine stop

In the event that a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed as follows:

1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically after the gear lever has been set in neutral position. Prior to this the information display showed the text PUT

GEAR IN NEUTRAL TO START.

Text message

In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may display text messages on the infor- mation display for certain situa- tions. A recommended action

should be performed for some of them. The following table shows some examples.

Message

AUTO START-

STOP ON

Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has been activated.

AUTO START-

STOP OFF

Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has been switched off.

Message

TURN KEY TO

START

The engine will not auto-startA - per- form a normal start using the key.

PUT GEAR IN

NEUTRAL TO

START

Set the gear lever in neutral positionB.

DEPRESS

CLUTCH PEDAL

TO START

The engine is ready to auto-start - wait- ing for declutching.

AUTO START-

STOP SERVICE

REQUIRED

Start/Stop function disengaged. A work- shop should be con- tacted.

A Occurs if the seatbelt is unbuckled after the engine has auto- stopped, for example.

B Occurs if a gear is engaged without declutching after the engine has auto-stopped.

If a message does not go out after performing an action a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended, which also applies in the event of the need for any other form of technical assistance.

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

169

Brake servo

If the car is rolling or is being towed with the engine turned off, the brake pedal must be depressed about 5 times harder than when the engine is running. If the brake pedal is depressed when the engine is started, you will feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to the brake servo becoming active. This may be more noticeable if the car has Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA).

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

NOTE

If braking with the engine switched off, press the brake pedal sharply once, not repeatedly.

Brake circuits

This symbol illuminates if a brake circuit is not working.

If a fault should occur in one of the circuits, it is still possible to brake

the car. The brake pedal will travel further and may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.

Dampness can affect braking

characteristics

Brake components become wet when the car is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water or when the car is washed. This may alter brake pad friction characteristics so that there is a delay before braking effect is noticed.

Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy snow, as well as after setting off in very damp or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads and dries off any water. This precaution is also recommended before parking the car for a long period in such weather conditions.

If the brakes are used heavily

When driving in the Alps or other roads with similar characteristics, the car's brakes are heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not being depressed especially hard.

Because speed is often low, the brakes are not cooled as effectively as when driving on flat roads at higher speed.

So as not to overload the brakes, shift down when driving downhill instead of using the foot brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as you would use driving uphill. This uses engine braking more efficiently so the foot brake is only required for brief periods.

Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an additional load on the car's brakes.

Anti-lock braking system - ABS

The anti-lock braking system (ABS) prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.

This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example.

After the engine has been started, the ABS will perform a brief self-test at a speed of about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as pulses in the brake pedal.

To get the most out of the ABS:

1. Depress the brake pedal with full force. Pulses will be felt.

2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do not release the pressure on the pedal.

Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf- fic-free area and in different weather condi- tions.

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

170

Emergency Brake Assistance EBA

For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) provides full-strength braking instanta- neously. The EBA function senses when heavy braking is underway by registering how quickly the brake pedal is depressed.

Continue braking without easing off on the brake pedal. The function disengages when the pressure on the brake pedal eases.

This function is always active. It cannot be dis- engaged.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu- minate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Emergency brake lights and automatic

hazard warning flashers

Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of sudden braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the hazard warning flashers are activated, and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button, see page 73.

06 Starting and driving

DSTC Stability and traction control system*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

General

The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking or acceleration when the system is in action. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Active Yaw Control

The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control

The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during accel- eration.

Traction control system

The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.

Reduced operation

G 02 90 57

Controls and information display.

Thumbwheel1

RESET button1

The stability system is activated automatically each time the car is started.

System operation during skidding and accel- eration can be partially deactivated. Operation during skidding is then delayed and so allows more skidding which provides greater freedom for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is improved at the same time as acceler- ation is no longer limited.

Operation

1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC menu appears.

DSTC ON means that the system function is unchanged.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that system operation is reduced.

2. Press and hold the RESET button until the DSTC menu is changed.

The system remains reduced until the driver reactivates it or until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time DSTC is back in its normal mode again.

WARNING

Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car.

NOTE

DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on the display each time the engine is started.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

06 Starting and driving

DSTC Stability and traction control system*

06

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Messages on the information display

TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF means that the system has been tempo- rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera- ture.

The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system disabled due to a fault.

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine. > If the message remains when the engine

is restarted, drive to a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Symbols in the combined instrument panel

DSTC system

Information

If the symbols and are displayed at the same time:

Read the message on the information dis- play.

If the symbol appears alone then it may appear as follows:

Flashing light means that the DSTC system is now being activated.

Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- tem check when the engine is started.

Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means that there is a fault in the DSTC system.

06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

General information on parking assistance

Parking assistance front and rear.

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. A signal indicates the distance to a detected obstacle.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren or animals near the car.

Variants

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only.

Both front and rear.

Function

The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. If the volume of another audio source from the audio system is high, then this is automatically lowered.

The tone becomes constant at a distance of about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this distance both behind and in front of the car, the signal alternates between left and right-hand speakers.

Rear parking assistance only

The system is automatically engaged when the car is started.

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged and the message Park

Assist active EXIT to deactivate is shown on the audio system's display.

If the system is switched off, the display shows Park Assist deactivated ENTER to

activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged. To change the settings, see page 84.

The distance covered behind the car is about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the rear loudspeakers.

Limitations

The system must be deactivated when revers- ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier would trigger the sensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

Parking assistance both front and rear

Button for Off/On (button location depends on other selected equipment).

06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

06

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The system is automatically engaged when the car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

Front

Front parking assistance is active at speeds below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher speeds. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.

The distance covered to the front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in front comes from the front loudspeakers.

Limitations

Front parking assistance cannot be combined with extra lights because the sensors are affec- ted by the extra lights.

Rear

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.

Limitations

See the previous section Rear parking assis- tance only.

Fault indicator

If the information symbol illumi- nates with constant glow and the display shows PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED then park- ing assistance is disengaged. For

attention, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Cleaning the sensors

Parking assistance sensors.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

General

G 02 02 95

Rearview mirror with BLIS system.

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

BLIS is an information system that under cer- tain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to vehicles moving in the same direc- tion in the so-called "blind spot".

The system is designed to work most effec- tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane highways.

BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam- eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.

When a camera has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu- minates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the sys- tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown in the information display. In such cases, check and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system can be switched off temporarily by pressing the BLIS button see page 176.

Blind spots

A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km/h.

Overtaking

The system is designed to react if you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle.

The system is designed to react if you are over- taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than your vehicle.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness

In daylight the system reacts to the shape of the surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head- lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with headlamps that are switched off are not detected by the system. This means for exam- ple that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not see as well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strong oncoming light or thick fog.

Activate/deactivate

Button for Off/On (button location depends on other selected equipment).

BLIS is activated when the engine is started. The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activated by pressing the BLIS button.

When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button goes out and a text message is shown on the instrument panel display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the button illuminates, a new text message is shown on the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times. Press the READ but-

ton to clear the text message. For more infor- mation on messages, see page 56.

BLIS system message

Text on the dis- play

Specification

BLIS ON The BLIS system is activated.

BLIS REDUCED

FUNCTION

Reduced function in data transmission between the BLIS system's camera and the car's electri- cal system.

The camera resets itself when the data transmission between the BLIS system's camera and the car's electri- cal system returns to normal.

BLIS CAMERA

BLOCKED

One or both cam- eras blocked - clean the lenses.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

Text on the dis- play

Specification

BLIS SERVICE

REQUIRED

Blind spot syst. dis- engaged - contact a workshop.

BLIS OFF The BLIS system is deactivated.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text BLIS SERVICE REQUIRED.

Here are several examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

G 01 81 77

Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.

Low sun in the camera.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

178

Start assistance

Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start. Do not tow the car to bump start the engine, see page 181.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.

Towing

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before towing begins.

1. Turn the remote control key to position II and unlock the steering lock so that the car can be steered, see page 155.

2. The key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.

3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

The steering lock must be unlocked before towing - the lock stays in the position it was in when the voltage was disconnected.

The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.

Never remove the key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.

NOTE

If the car is de-energised then the steering lock must be unlocked using a donor bat- tery before towing can be started.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox

Prior to towing:

Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic

Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.

Automatic gearbox Powershift

The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis- sion, this can be verified by checking the des- ignation on the decal number (5) under the bonnet - see page 286. The designation "MPS6" means that it is Powershift transmis- sion - otherwise it is Geartronic transmission.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

179

IMPORTANT

Avoid towing.

However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h. Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling for- ward.

In the event of moving a longer distance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recom- mended.

Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

Towing eye

The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.

Fitting the towing eye

Take out the towing eye (1) that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:

Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess,

turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.

The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the mark- ing with a finger and fold out the oppo- site side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store the towbar's towball in the car, see page 184.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

180

Recovery

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

The car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

IMPORTANT

Cars with automatic gearbox must only be towed with drive wheels raised from the road.

06 Starting and driving

Start assistance

06

181

Starting with a donor battery

If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:

1. Turn the remote control key to key position 0.

2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

5. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).

6. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative ter- minal (3).

7. Fit the other clamp to a grounding point, such as by the left-hand spring strut (4).

8. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure.

9. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

10. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

11. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump

lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.

For more information on the car's battery - see page 230.

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

182

General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 289.

If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with a Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket follows the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure decal location, see page 198.

Clean the towing bracket regularly and grease the towball1.

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Please wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Trailer weights

For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see page 289.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

Manual gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.

Diesel engine 5-cyl

If an engine starts to run too hot, the instru- ment panel will display a text message which recommends switching to a lower gear - follow the recommendation given.

In the event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant.

1 Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

183

Automatic gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.

Steep inclines

Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.

IMPORTANT

See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 163.

Parking on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to parking position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a

hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.

Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Towbar

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose sec- tion must be followed carefully, see page 186.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the installation instructions care- fully.

The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks

The towbar's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.

Storing the towbar

G 03 11 18

Towbar storage space.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.

Trailer cable

G 01 45 89

An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

Specifications

G 01 03 93 G 01 03 87

G 01 03 88

Dimensions for mounting points (mm)

A B C D E F G H I J K

Fixed towbar standard 1115 81

964 482 40 141 542 150

113

100 140 Fixed towbar with Nivomat 1111 76

Detachable towbar standard 1115 81 63

Detachable towbar with Nivomat 1111 77

1 Side member

2 Ball centre

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fitting the towbar

G 01 73 17

1. Remove the protective cover by first press- ing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .

G 02 03 01

2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock- wise.

G 02 03 02

3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows red. If the window does not show red, press in and turn the locking wheel anti- clockwise until you hear a click.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

G 02 03 04

4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.

G 02 03 06

5. Check that the indicator window shows green.

G 02 03 07

6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- tion. Remove the key from the lock.

G 02 03 09

7. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02 03 10

8. Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.

Removing the towbar

G 02 03 01

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.

G 02 03 12

2. Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

G 02 03 14

3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see page 184.

G 01 73 18

4. Push on the protective cover.

06 Starting and driving

Loading

06

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- mation on weights, see page 289.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

Loading the cargo area

Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the car in motion.

To increase the size of the cargo area, the head restraints can be removed and the seats folded down, see page 118.

Place the load firmly against the backrest in front.

The head rests can be removed so that they are not damaged.

Put wide loads in the centre.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a lowered backrest.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery or the glass surface of the tailgate.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

WARNING

Never load cargo above the backrest.

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads.

Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

Load carriers*

To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving, it is recom- mended to use load carriers specially designed for your car by Volvo.

Carefully follow the mounting instructions sup- plied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the load's size.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads.

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

191

Correct light pattern for left or right- hand traffic

G 02 03 17

Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.

Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a control in each headlamp housing to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists.

The correct pattern will also better illuminate the verge.

Halogen headlamps

G 02 14 21

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

Headlamps with Active Bending Lights

G 02 14 22

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 194 Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 198 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * .................................................... 199 Changing wheels................................................................................... 201 Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 203

WHEELS AND TYRES

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

194

Driving characteristics and tyres

The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha- racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and preferably also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels. Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified on the tyre pressure label, see page 198.

Designation of dimensions

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example: 205/55R16 91 W.

205 Tyre width (mm)

55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

16 Rim diameter in inches (")

91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)

W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratings

The car is approved as a whole, which means that dimensions and speed ratings must not differ from those specified on the vehicle reg- istration document. The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with metal studs and those without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).

Remember that traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed class of the tyres.

Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is espe- cially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac- tured in week 15 of 2010.

Tyre age

All tyres older than six years should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged.

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

195

The reason for this is that tyres age and decom- pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected due to the tyre's constituent materials being broken down. In such a case the tyre should then not be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

The age of the tyre can be determined by the DOT marking, see previous illustration.

More even wear and maintenance

The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear, see page 198. Driving style, tyre pres- sure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable dis- tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-

wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos- sible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up, and not standing up.

Tyres with tread wear indicators

G 02 03 23

Tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that

tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres

Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- cially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

196

recommended not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

Snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive cars.

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.

Rims and wheel nuts

Only use wheel rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are included in the Volvo genuine accessories range.

Standard wheel nuts.

Bulge acorn wheel nuts.

There are two types of wheel nut, depending on whether the wheel rims are made of steel or aluminium.

1. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (1) to 110 Nm. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (2) to 130 Nm.

2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

IMPORTANT

The wheel nuts (1) should be tightened to 110 Nm and (2) to 130 Nm respectively. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.

Steel rims standard wheel nuts (1)

Steel rims are normally mounted with the standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari- ety may also be used.

WARNING

Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims. The wheel could come loose.

Aluminium rims bulge acorn wheel nuts

(2)

Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with aluminium rims.

NOTE

These nuts may also be used with steel rims.

Locking wheel nuts

Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu- minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197

ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.

NOTE

Tighten the lockable wheel nuts to 110 Nm.

Spare wheel Temporary Spare*

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- sible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, see page 299.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

Summer and winter wheels

G 02 03 25

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

When summer and winter wheels are changed, see page 201, the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rota- tion marked with an arrow.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direc- tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only

be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.

If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain, snow and slush out of the way are adversely affected.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth.

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Recommended tyre pressure

G 02 07 91

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar shows which pressures the tyres should have at different load and speed conditions.

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre size

ECO pressure1

Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).

Checking the tyre pressure

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

Even after several kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So air must not be released if the pressure is checked when the tyres are warm. While the pressure must be increased if it is too low.

Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con- sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low can also result in the tyres overheating and disintegrating.

For information on the correct tyre pressure, refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature.)

Fuel economy, ECO pressure

At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre pressure for maximum load is recommended in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.

DRIVe*

An important detail in connection with environ- mentally-conscious driving is to use the right type of tyres and to drive with the correct air pressure inside them.

Dimensions

When fitting new tyres, the same type and brand as the car was equipped with from the factory are recommended - they are designed for low fuel consumption.

The 195/65 R15 and 205/55 R16 dimensions generally provide a slightly lower consumption than wider variants.

Pressure

Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con- sumption. For this reason, check the pressure in the tyres regularly.

By using so-called ECO pressure2 fuel con- sumption is minimised. A certain impact on ride comfort, road noise and steering characteris- tics may be experienced, but this does not affect safety.

See the decal with the recommended tyre pressure adjacent to the driver's door pillar.

1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy. 2 The pressure that is recommended for maximum load.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

Warning triangle

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suita- ble place with regard to the traffic.

1. Undo the case containing the warning tri- angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take the warning triangle from the case.

2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are firmly secured in the cargo area after use.

Spare wheel* and jack *

The car's original jack*

The original jack must only be used for chang- ing wheels. The jack's thread should always be well greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the cargo area.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.

Taking out the spare wheel

1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Release the spare wheel and lift it out.

3. Take out the jack* plus crank and the wheel wrench*.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

07

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into

the cargo area

1. Crank the jack (3) to halfway in order that the jack shall fit horizontally in the bracket.

2. Fold in the handle (6) and place the wheel wrench (2) on the jack.

3. Put the jack (3) back in the hole on the right (4). Fasten the spare wheel (1) in the hole on the left (5).

Tools - returning into place

Tools and jack* must be returned into place in the correct manner after use.

For cars equipped with spare wheel, the jack must be cranked so that it fits into the spare wheel.

For cars equipped with emergency punc- ture repair kit, the jack must be fully cranked together and returned into the foam block.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

First aid*

A case with first aid equipment is located in the cargo area.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

Removing wheels

G 02 03 31

Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be changed at a busy location. Make sure that the car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.

1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel wrench* that are located under the carpet in the cargo area. If another jack is selected, see page 219.

2. Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by hand.

5. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench.

G 02 03 32

Telescopic wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

6. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground. Check that the jack is seated cor- rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus- trated, and that the base is located directly under it.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

202

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level.

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.

Fitting the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is important that the wheel nuts are tightened properly.

Standard wheel nuts - tightening tor- que: 110 Nm

Domed wheel nuts - tightening torque: 130 Nm

Check the torque with a torque wrench.

5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203

Emergency puncture repair, general information

The emergency puncture repair kit is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc- tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.

12V sockets for the compressor are located by the centre console in the front, by the rear seat and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Taking out the emergency puncture

repair kit

The emergency puncture repair kit with com- pressor and tools are stored under the floor in the cargo area.

1. Fold up the cargo area floor.

2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.

Overview

G 02 04 00

Decal, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing punctured tyres

G 01 97 23

For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture repair kit.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is 3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Rechecking the repair and pressure

1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf- ficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure

specified on the tyre pressure decal. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit to the cargo area.

7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Inflating the tyres

The car's original tyres can be inflated by the compressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- sure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Changing the sealing fluid canister

Replace the bottle before the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.

07 Wheels and tyres

07

207

208

Cleaning................................................................................................ 210 Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 214 Rustproofing......................................................................................... 215

CAR CARE

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

210

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion.

Do not park the car in direct sunlight. Washing a car with hot paintwork can cause permanent paintwork damage. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator.

Hose down the underbody thoroughly.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades

Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Removing bird droppings

Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. This discoloration can only be removed by a specialist.

Chromed wheels

IMPORTANT

Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.

Automatic car washes

An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it can never replace a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto- matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.

IMPORTANT

Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.

High-pressure washing

When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts).

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211

IMPORTANT

Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. When using a pressure washer: Make sure that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components

A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components (such as glossy trim mouldings). When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tions must be followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations con- tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paint- work. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war- ranty.

Water-repellent coating*

Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfa-

ces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellent coating.

NOTE

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

212

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product.

Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Carpets and cargo area

Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom- mended by your Volvo dealer!

Treatment of stains on textile upholstery

and headliner

A special fabric cleaning agent, available from authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery

Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free and is treated to preserve its original appear- ance.

Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac- teristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean- ing and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend- ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year (or more if necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- able from your Volvo dealer.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.

Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery

1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

213

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery

Vacuuming is important prior to using leather care agents.

1. Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.

The leather has now been given improved pro- tection against stains and improved UV pro- tection.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g. rings).

Washing instructions for the leather

steering wheel

Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois- tened sponge and neutral soap.

Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas- tic.

Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care agents are recommended for best results.

If the steering wheel has stains:

Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)

Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)

Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)

1. Same procedure as group I.

2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.

Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)

1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.

2. Same procedure as group I.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts

A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers.

Cleaning seatbelts

Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

08 Car care

Touching up paintwork

08

214

Paintwork

Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked reg- ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings and doors.

Colour code

Data plate.

Code for car colour

It is important that the correct colour is used. For product decal location, see page 286.

Stone chips and scratches

G 02 03 45

Before touching up paintwork, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

Materials

Primer in a can

Spray can or touch-up pen1

Masking tape.

Minor stone chips and scratches

If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the dam- aged area.

If the stone chip has penetrated to the

bare metal

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of lapping paste.

1 Follow the instructions contained in the touch-up pen's packaging.

08 Car care

Rustproofing

08

215

Inspection and maintenance

Your car has already received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resis- tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene- trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the members, cavities and closed sections.

Maintain the car's rustproofing.

Keep the car clean. Hose down the under- body. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur- faces.

Regularly check and touch-up the rust- proofing treatment as necessary.

The car's rustproofing does not normally require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three- year intervals. If the car needs further treat- ment, Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.

216

Volvo service......................................................................................... 218 Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 219 Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 220 Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 222 Wiper blades......................................................................................... 228 Battery................................................................................................... 230 Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 234 Fuses..................................................................................................... 241

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service 09

218

Volvo service programme

Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly test driven. It was checked again in accord- ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations before it was handed over to you.

To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos- sible, follow the Volvo service programme specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo also recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo work- shops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest qual- ity of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Special service measures

Certain service measures which affect the car's electrical system can only be performed using electronic equipment specially developed for your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before beginning or performing service work that affects the electrical system.

09 Maintenance and service

Self-maintenance 09

219

Before starting work on the car

Battery

Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).

Never use a quick charger to charge the bat- tery. The battery cables must be disconnected when charging the battery.

The battery contains acid that is both corrosive and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the battery in an environmentally correct manner. Let your Volvo dealer assist you.

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- tem is highly dangerous. The ignition must therefore always be switched off for work in the engine compartment.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.

Raising the car

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recom- mended by Volvo, follow the instructions for use supplied with the equipment.

If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi- tion the jack against the front edge on the sub- frame.

Do not damage the splashguard under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.

If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points. See preceding illustration.

Check regularly

Check the following at regular intervals, for example, when refuelling:

Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Fill washer fluid with antifreeze at temperatures around freezing point.

Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment 09

220

Opening the bonnet

G 02 07 93

The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.

1. Pull the handle on the far left under the instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars the handle is on the far right.) You will hear when the catch releases.

2. Insert your hand under the centre of the front edge of the bonnet and press the safety catch to the right.

3. Open the bonnet.

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Engine compartment

Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)

Coolant expansion tank

Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con- cealed behind the headlamp)

Dipstick1 for engine oil2

Radiator

Radiator fan

Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)

Filling the engine oil2

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)

1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel). 2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment 09

221

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Air filter2

2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

222

Checking the engine oil

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

Always use oil of the prescribed grade. Check the oil level frequently and change the oil regularly. The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.

When driving under adverse conditions, see page 292.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer- tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis- play texts. Certain models have both variants. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- ance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade, see page 292.

For capacities, see page 293 and onwards.

Engine with oil dipstick1

Petrol engine.

Dipstick, petrol engines.

Filler pipe, engine oil.

1 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

223

Diesel engine.

Dipstick, 4-cyl diesel engines.

Filler pipe, engine oil.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme- diately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.

G 02 03 36

The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.

Measurement and filling if required

1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.

2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.

3. Re-insert the dipstick.

4. Pull it out and check the level.

5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres should be added. If the level is significantly

below, then an additional amount is required.

6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps 1 - 4.

WARNING

Never fill above the MAX mark. The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

224

For engines with electronic oil level

sensor2

Filler pipe.3

You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display, see the illustration below.

Message and graph in the display.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see page 65.

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

In the event of the message Oil level low, Fill oil, only fill with 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The oil level is only detected by the system during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.

WARNING

Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

2 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel. 3 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

225

Measuring the oil level

If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below.

1. Activate key position II, see page 154.

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Engine oil level

Please wait.... > You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom- mended filling level is 4.

Washer fluid, topping up

G 02 03 35

Location of washer fluid reservoir4.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.

For capacities, see the table Fluids on page 295.

Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.

Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.

Add washer fluid with antifreeze in the winter so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

NOTE

Mix concentrated washer fluid with water before filling.

TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up washer fluid.

Checking and topping up the coolant

G 02 03 34

When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con- ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk

4 Depending on engine alternative.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

226

of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem- peratures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding water quality, see page 295.

Check the coolant regularly

The level must lie between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system is not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when the level falls to the MIN mark.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

NOTE

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera- tures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

Checking and topping up the brake and clutch fluid

G 02 03 33

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

227

Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir5. The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly. Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see the table Fluids on page 295.

The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi- cal climates with high humidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Checking and topping up the power steering fluid

NOTE

Check the level frequently.

The fluid does not require changing. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see page 295.

If a fault should arise in the power steering sys- tem or if the car is without power and must be towed, it can still be steered. However, the steering will be much heavier than normal and it will require more effort to turn the steering wheel.

5 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.

09 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades 09

228

Wiper blades

G 02 03 30

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the other side.

Cleaning

For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see page 210.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.

Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen 1. Lift up the wiper arm.

2. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out (1), parallel with the wiper arm.

3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. > Check (3) that the blade is firmly instal-

led and fold down the wiper arm.

Changing the rear window wiper blade

G 01 47 32

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Detach the wiper blade by pulling it towards the rear window.

3. Press the new wiper blade into position.

09 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades 09

229

> Check that it is firmly installed and fold back the wiper arm.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

230

Operation

The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ditions and climatic conditions.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.

Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits star- ting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information in the owner's manual.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains cor- rosive acid.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recy- cling.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally correct manner as it con- tains lead.

Changing the battery

Removal

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.

2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any electrical terminals. > The car's electrical system needs to

store the necessary information to the control modules.

3. Remove the cover.

4. Detach the black negative cable.

WARNING

Connect and remove the positive and neg- ative cables in the correct order.

5. Detach the red positive cable.

6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using a screwdriver.

7. Detach the ventilation hose from the bat- tery.

8. Release the clamp securing the battery.

9. Remove the battery.

Fitting

1. Fit the battery into position.

2. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.

3. Connect the ventilation hose. > Check that it is correctly connected to

both battery and outlet in the body.

4. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Attach the cover to the battery.

For more information on the car's battery - see pages 181 and 301.

DRIVe Start/Stop*

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful battery for starting and one standby battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's star- ting sequence.

For more information on Start/Stop - see page 165.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

232

Battery Start Standby

Cold start capacityA, CCA (A)

760 120

Dimen- sionsB, LWH (mm)

27817519 0

15090106

Capacity (Ah)

70 8

A In accordance with the SAE standard. B Largest possible size.

NOTE

The higher the current take-off in the car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more the batteries must be charged = increased fuel consumption.

When the capacity of the battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is disen- gaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:

The engine auto-starts1 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal.

Location of the batteries

1. Battery2 2. Standby battery.

The standby battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery that is used for starting. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may temporar- ily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis

may be used as the grounding point. See the section "Start assistance" - for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

1 Auto-start can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position. 2 The battery is described in detail on page 230.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

233

NOTE

If the battery has become so discharged that everything is "black" and in principle the car does not have all the normal electri- cal functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or battery charger, then the Start/Stop function will be activated. It will then be possible for the engine to be auto-stopped but in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may fail to auto-start the engine due to inade- quate capacity in the battery.

The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto-start after an auto- stop. At an outside temperature of +15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3-4 hours is recom- mended. The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an external battery charger.

If this is not possible then the recommen- dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged.

For more information about recharging the battery, see the section "Battery" in the chapter "Maintenance and service".

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

234

General

All bulb specifications are given on page 301.

The following list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised or unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:

Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon lamps)

Xenon headlamps (Xenon lamps)

Daytime running lights (DRL) in the spoiler

Direction indicators, door mirror and approach lighting

Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glo- vebox lighting

General interior lighting in the roof

Brake light

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Changing front bulbs

G 01 95 99

All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are changed by first removing the lamp housing from the engine compartment.

Removing the lamp housing

1. Remove the remote control key and turn the light switch to position 0.

2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.

3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then forward.

4. Unplug the connector by pressing down the clip with a thumb while moving out the connector with the other hand.

G 01 96 00

5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

235

Fitting the lamp housing

1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp housing and locking pin. Check that the pin is correctly inserted.

2. Check the lighting.

The lamp housing must be plugged in and secured in place before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key inserted into the ignition switch.

Dipped beam G 01 91 31

Removing the cover and bulb

1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see page 234.

2. Bend aside the catches and remove the cover.

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Release the spring clip securing the bulb. Press it in/down.

5. Pull out the bulb.

G 01 91 33

Fitting a new bulb

1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi- tion.

2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly to the right in order to snap it into position.

3. Press the connector back on.

4. Refit the plastic cover.

5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.

Main beam, Halogen

G 01 91 36

The illustration shows a halogen bulb.

1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see page 234.

2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it anticlockwise.

3. Left-hand headlamp:

Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Right-hand headlamp:

Turn the bulb holder clockwise.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the bulb.

5. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted in one position.

6. Refit the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it clockwise.

7. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.

Position/parking lamps

G 01 91 45

1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 234.

2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it anticlockwise.

3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the bulb.

4. Press the bulb holder back on. A "click" is heard when the bulb holder is fitted cor- rectly.

5. Refit the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it clockwise.

6. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.

NOTE

ABL headlamps* have a position lamp (LED) that cannot be replaced.

Direction indicators

G 01 91 50

1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 234.

2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and remove it.

3. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder, press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into the lamp housing.

5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

237

Side marker lamps

G 01 80 50

1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 234.

2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and withdraw it. Replace the bulb.

3. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one position.

4. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.

Front fog lamps

G 01 96 05

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.

2. Undo the cover by inserting a screwdriver as illustrated (vertically) and continue to press vertically in order to undo the clip inside the cover.

3. Grip the edge of the cover and pull straight out.

4. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull it out.

5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.

6. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise. (The profile of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb.)

7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward.

Removing the bulb holder

G 01 91 66

All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.

2. Remove the cover (A or B) in the left/right- hand panel to access the bulbs.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

238

3. The bulbs are located in separate bulb holders.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.

5. Press the catches together and pull out the bulb holder.

6. Replace the bulb.

7. Plug in the connector.

8. Press the bulb holder into place and refit the cover (A or B).

NOTE

If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recom- mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

Location of bulbs in the rear bulb holder

G 01 80 58

Bulb holder.

IMPORTANT

The cable for the brake light's LED lamps is moulded into the upper bulb holder. It shall not be removed.

Brake light (LED)

Position lamp

Position/parking lamps

Direction indicators

Reversing lamp

Rear fog lamp (one side)

NOTE

The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the left rear light cluster on a left-hand drive car and in the right on a right-hand drive.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

Number plate lighting

G 01 48 49

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.

2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

3. Detach the lens carefully.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. Refit and screw in the lens.

Cargo area

G 01 48 52

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Remove the blown bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

Vanity mirror lighting*

G 02 02 53

Removing the mirror glass

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the lug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right-hand sides (by the black rubber sections), and prize carefully so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover.

4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with a new one.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

240

Fitting the mirror glass

1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of mirror glass back into position.

2. Then press the three lower lugs back into position.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

241

General

All electrical functions and components are fused to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting and overload- ing.

The fuses are in two different locations in the car:

Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart- ment.

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart- ment.

Changing

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew.

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

Each fuse box has space for several spare fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the component. In which case, Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for this to be checked.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

242

Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment

G 00 74 46

The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

Fuses 19-36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.

Fuses 7-18 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop.1

Fuses 1-6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop.1

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

G 02 02 50

1. Cooling fan 50 A

2. Power steering 80 A

3. Supply to passenger compart- ment fuse box 60 A

4. Supply to passenger compart- ment fuse box 60 A

5. PTC element, air preheater* 80 A

6. Glow plugs (DRIVe) 60 A

Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A

7. ABS pump 40 A

8. ABS valves 20 A

9. Engine functions 30 A

10. Ventilation fan 40 A

11. Headlamp washers 20 A

12. Heated rear window 30 A

13. Actuator solenoid, starter motor 30 A

14. Trailer wiring* 40 A

15. Reserve

16. Infotainment system 30 A

17. Windscreen wipers 30 A

18. Supply to passenger compart- ment fuse box 40 A

19. Reserve

20. Horn 15 A

21. Fuel-driven additional heater, passenger compartment heater* 20 A

22. Reserve

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

23. Engine control module (5-cyl. petrol), Transmission control module (5-cyl.) 10 A

Transmission control module (4-cyl.) 15 A

24. Heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel), PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl. diesel) 20 A

25. Central electronic module (CEM) (Start/Stop) 10 A

26. Ignition switch 15 A

27. A/C compressor 10 A

28. Reserve

29. Front fog lamps

Daytime running lights (DRL)* 15 A

30. Coolant pump (Start/Stop) 10 A

31. Voltage regulator, alternator (4-cyl. petrol) 10 A

32. Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), Turbo control valve (5-cyl. diesel), Oil level sensor (5-cyl. diesel)

Control valve, fuel flow (DRIVe), Mass air flow sensor (DRIVe), Control motor turbo (DRIVe) 10 A

33. Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol), Relay coil, relay, vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol), Engine control module (5-cyl. diesel), Heated fuel filter (DRIVe) 20 A

34. Ignition coils (petrol), Pressure switch, climate control system (5-cyl.), Control module, glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel), EGR emission control (5-cyl. diesel), Fuel pump (DRIVe), Lambda- sond (DRIVe), Engine control module (Start/Stop), Relay coils, relays Start/Stop 10 A

35. Relay coil, relay, climate con- trol system, PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl. petrol), Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol), Turbo control valve (5-cyl. pet- rol), Solenoids, variable valve timing (5-cyl. petrol), Injectors (2.0 l petrol), EVAP valve (2.0 l petrol), Valve, air/fuel mixture (2.0 l petrol), Control valve, fuel pressure (5-cyl. diesel), Engine control module (5-cyl. diesel), Engine EGR (DRIVe) 15 A

36. Engine control module (petrol, DRIVe), Accelerator pedal position sensor (5-cyl. diesel), Lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245

DRIVe Start/Stop*

Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.

No. Component A

11M/1 Engine compartment, electrical distribution unit

125

11M/2 Sensor, battery monitor- ing

15

25 Central electronic mod- ule (CEM) (Reference voltage standby bat- tery), diesel engine

10

For more information on DRIVe Start/Stop - see page 165.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

246

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment

G 02 06 01

The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses are located under the glovebox. The box also provides space for several spare fuses. Tools for fuse replacement are located in the relay/ fuse box in the engine compartment, see page 242.

Replacing fuses

1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box by pressing in the pin in the centre of the clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw- ing the clips.

2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove them.

3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it towards the seat until it stops. Lower it

completely. The fuse box can be fully unhooked.

4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.

5. Remove the pins from the centre of the clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the pins into the clips. This expands the clips and secures the trim.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

43. Telematics*, Audio system, RTI*, Bluetooth* 15 A

44. SRS system, Engine control module (5-cyl, DRIVe) 10 A

45. Electrical socket, passenger compartment 15 A

46. Passenger compartment, glo- vebox and courtesy lighting 5 A

47. Interior lighting, Remote con- trolled garage door opener* 5 A

48. Washer, rear window 15 A

49. SRS system 10 A

50. Reserve

51. PTC element, air preheater*, Relay coil, relay, heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel), AWD 10 A

52. Transmission control module, ABS system 5 A

53. Power steering 10 A

54. Parking assistance*, Xenon* 10 A

55. Control module Keyless* 20 A

56. Remote control receiver, Siren* 10 A

57. Data link connector (DLC), brake light switch 15 A

58. Main beam, right, Relay coil, relay, auxiliary lamps* 7.5 A

59. Main beam, left 7.5 A

60. Seat heating (driver's side) 15 A

61. Seat heating (passenger side) 15 A

62. Sunroof* 20 A

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

63. Supply to rear right door 20 A

64. Reserve

65. Audio, Infotainment 5 A

66. Audio, Infotainment, Climate control system 10 A

67. Reserve

68. Cruise control 5 A

69. Climate control system, Rain sensor, Buttons for BLIS*, parking assistance*, DRIVe 5 A

70. Reserve

71. Reserve

72. Reserve

73. Sunroof*, Overhead console for interior lighting, Seatbelt reminder, rear, Dimming, inte- rior rearview mirror* 5 A

74. Fuel pump 15 A

75. Reserve

76. Reserve

77. Electrical socket cargo area, Control module, accessories* 15 A

78. Reserve

79. Reversing lamp, Dimming, interior rearview mirror (signal) 5 A

80. Reserve -

81. Supply to rear left door 20 A

82. Supply to front right door 25 A

83. Supply to front left door 25 A

84. Power seat, passenger 25 A

85. Power seat, driver 25 A

86. Interior lighting, cargo area lighting, power seats, fuel level display (2.0F) 5 A

09 Maintenance and service

09

249

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 252 Audio functions..................................................................................... 254 Radio functions..................................................................................... 259 CD functions......................................................................................... 264 Menu structure audio system............................................................. 267 Phone functions*................................................................................... 268 Menu structure phone*....................................................................... 275 Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 278

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

10 Infotainment system

General

10

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Infotainment system

G 02 02 45

POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/ off

Display

Keypad

MENU - Goes to the menu system

Navigation buttons

EXIT - Exits the menu system

ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates

Infotainment is a system that integrates the audio system and phone*. The infotainment

system can be easily operated using the con- trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see page 72. The display (2) shows messages and information on the current function.

Audio system

On/Off

POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys- tem. If the audio system is active when the remote control key is turned to position 0 then it continues to be active until the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. The audio system is started automatically the next time the remote control key is turned to posi- tion I.

Menus

Some infotainment system functions are con- trolled via a menu system. The current menu level is shown at the top right of the display. Menu options are shown in the middle of the display.

MENU (4) leads to the menu system.

Up/down with the navigation button (5) moves between menu options.

ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates one of the menu options.

EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the menu system.

Shortcuts

Menu options are numbered and can also be selected directly with the keypad (3). So first press MENU and then the figure/figures for the desired menu option.

Equipment

The audio system can be equipped with differ- ent options and different versions. There are three audio system versions:

Performance,

High Performance* or

Premuim Sound*

However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CD player are included in all audio systems.

10 Infotainment system

General

10

253

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 1

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right and rear speakers. This provides a more real- istic sound quality than that provided by stand- ard two-channel stereo.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manu- factured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

1 Premium Sound.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio controls

VOLUME - Knob

AM/FM Audio source selection

MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX, USB (e.g. iPod )1 and BT*

TUNING - Knob

SOUND - Button

Navigation button - Menus

Volume

Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad to regulate the volume, see page 72. Audio vol-

ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi- cle speed, see page 257.

Audio source selection

Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches between FM1, FM2 and AM.

Repeatedly pressing MODE changes between CD, USB, AUX and BT.

External audio sources

AUX, USB*

General

AUX input

USB input*

The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec- tion of an external audio source, e.g. an iPod 1 or MP3 player.

If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 player or a USB memory stick to the USB connection then you can control the media via the car's audio controls.

1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

255

Use the MODE button to select the external audio source you wish to use.

1. If USB is selected then Connect device is shown in the display.

2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USB memory stick to the USB connection in the centre console's storage compartment (see preceding illustration). > The text Loading appears on the dis-

play when the system loads the file structure on the storage media. This takes a while.

When the loading is finished the track informa- tion is shown on the display and it is possible to select the track required.

Track selection can take place in the following three ways:

Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock- wise.

Use the right or left-hand button (6) of the navigation control to scroll to the desired track.

With the steering wheel keypad.

In USB or iPod mode the infotainment system operates in an equivalent way to the CD player for playing back music files. For more information, see page 264.

NOTE

The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- mats that are not supported by the system. The system also supports most iPod mod- els produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.

USB memory

To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor- ing any files other than music files in the mem- ory. It takes considerably longer for the system to load storage media that contains items other than playable music files.

NOTE

The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi- mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The memory must have a capacity of at least 256 Mb.

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device/Mass Storage

Device mode.

iPod

An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection via the player's con- nection cable. However, if the player's battery is completely discharged then it must be charged before the player is connected.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.

AUX

Sometimes the AUX external audio source can be heard at a different volume to the internal audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio volume of the external audio source is too high then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre- vent this by adjusting the input volume of the AUX input.

NOTE

The sound quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Streaming audio via Bluetooth *

General

If the car is equipped with Bluetooth hands- free* and a mobile phone is connected then the audio system can wirelessly play back stream- ing audio files from the mobile phone. Naviga- tion and control of the sound can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steer- ing wheel keypad*. In some mobile phones it is also possible to change tracks from the phone.

To be able to play back the audio a device must first be paired and connected to the car. For information about pairing and connection, see page 278. BT must also be selected as audio source, see page 254.

NOTE

The Bluetooth mobile phone must support the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). The phone should use AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise some functions may not work.

NOTE

Not all mobile phones available in the mar- ket are fully compatible with the Bluetooth function in the car's audio sys- tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones and external media players.

Playback

Press the MODE button repeatedly in order to select BT as audio source.

Audio file selection can take place in the fol- lowing three ways:

Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock- wise.

Use the or button (6) of the naviga- tion control to scroll to the desired audio file.

With the or buttons on the steering wheel keypad.

Audio settings

Adjusting audio settings

Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse among the following options. Adjust by turning TUNING.

BASS - Bass level.

TREBLE - Treble level.

FADER Balance between the front and rear speakers.

BALANCE Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.

SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub- woofer must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deactivating the subwoofer below.

CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker. Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deacti- vating surround sound below.

SURROUND2 - Level for surround. Pro Logic II must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Audio settings below.

2 Premium Sound.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

257

Activating/deactivating the subwoofer

Press MENU and then ENTER.

Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.

Surround2

Surround settings govern the spatial perception of the sound. Settings and activating/deactivating are sep- arate for each audio source.

G 02 12 16

The Dolby icon in the display indicates that Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three different settings for surround sound:

Dolby Pro Logic II

3 channel

Off - 2 channel stereo.

Activating/deactivating surround sound

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Surround FM, Surround

AM, Surround CDor Surround

AUX and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel

or Off and press ENTER.

Equalizer front/rear4

The equalizer can be used to adjust different frequency bands separately.

Adjusting equalizer

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Equalizer front or Equalizer

rear and press ENTER.

4. The graphic on the display indicates the audio level of the frequency in question.

5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/ down with the navigation button. Addi- tional frequencies can be selected using the left/right navigation button.

6. Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit without saving the settings.

Automatic volume control5

The auto volume control function allows the audio volume to increase as the speed of the car increases. There are three levels to choose from: Low, Medium and High.

Adjusting automatic volume control

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Auto. volume control and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press ENTER.

Optimum sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak- ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- bination of car model and audio system.

2 Premium Sound. 3 Not available in AM and FM mode. 4 Certain audio systems. 5 Not Performance

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer* are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

259

Radio controls

G 01 98 06

FM/AM Wavelength selection

Station presets

TUNING Knob for station searches

SCAN Scanning

Navigation button - Tuning and menus

EXIT - Cancel current function

AUTO Automatic storage of stations

Tuning

Automatic tuning

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Give a brief press on or .

The radio then automatically searches for the next strong station.

Manual tuning

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING

(3).

Tune into a station with a long press on or . Or by using the steering wheel keypad:

Hold in or on the navigation button depressed until the desired frequency appears on the display.

As long as the frequency graphic appears on the display, searching can be resumed by briefly pressing or .

Storing stations

Ten station presets can be stored per wave- length. FM has two memories for presets: FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected using the preset buttons (2) or the steering wheel keypad.

Storing stations manually

1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold a station preset button depressed until the message Station stored appears on the display.

Automatic storage of stations

AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta- tions and stores them automatically in a sepa- rate memory. The function is especially useful in areas where the radio stations and their fre- quencies are unfamiliar.

Starting automatic storage of stations

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until Autostoring appears on the display.

Once Autostoring disappears from the dis- play, the stations are stored. The radio contin- ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the display. The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons (2).

Cancelling automatic storage of stations

Press EXIT (6).

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

260

Selecting an auto-stored preset

Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro- vides access to the autostored presets.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7). > Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button (2). > The radio remains in Auto mode until it

is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7), EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Auto mode.

Storing autostored presets in another

memory

An autostored preset can be transferred to the FM or AM memory.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7). > Auto appears on the display.

2. Press the preset button for the station you want to move.

3. Press the button under which the station will be stored and hold it depressed until the message Station stored appears on the display. > The radio exits Auto mode and the

stored station can be selected as a pre- set.

Scanning

SCAN (4) automatically searches through a wavelength for strong stations. When a station is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds before scanning is resumed.

Activating/deactivating Scan

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.

2. Press SCAN to activate. > SCAN appears on the display. Close

using SCAN or EXIT.

Storing a station

A selected station can be stored as a preset while SCAN is active.

Press a station preset button and hold it depressed until the message Station

stored appears on the display. > Scanning is interrupted and the stored

station can be selected as a preset.

RDS functions1

Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:

Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.

Searches for programme form, such as traffic information or news.

Receives text information on current radio programme.

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality.

Programme functions

In FM mode, the radio can search for stations with certain programme types. If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans- mission is played at a preset audio volume, see page 263. The radio returns to the previous audio source and audio volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro-

1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

261

gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest.

If you want to return to the interrupted audio source before the message or programme type has been completed, press EXIT.

For further programme interruption settings, see EON and REG see page 262. The pro- gramme functions are modified via the menu system, see page 252.

Alarm

This function is used to warn of serious acci- dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The message ALARM! appears on the display when an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information TP

This function allows traffic informa- tion broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through. TP

shows that the function has been activated. If the set station can send traffic information then appears on the display.

G 02 12 20

Activating/deactivating TP

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

TP from current station/all stations

The radio can interrupt with traffic information from only the set (current) station or from all stations.

1. Select an FM station.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to TP station and press ENTER. > Either TP from current station or TP

from all stations is shown on the dis- play.

6. Press ENTER.

Activating/deactivating TP search

TP search is useful during long journeys while an audio source other than the radio is being played. The function automatically searches for traffic information within different RDS networks.

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.

News

This function allows news broad- casts within a set station's RDS network to break through. The message News shows that the func-

tion is active.

G 02 12 21

Activating/deactivating News

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.

News from current station/all stations

The radio can interrupt with news from only the set (current) station or from all stations.

1. Select an FM station.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to News station and press ENTER. > Either News from current station or

News from all stations is shown on the display.

5. Press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

262

Programme types PTY

The PTY function can be used to select different programme types, such as Pop music and Serious

classic. The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active. This function allows programme types broadcast within a set sta- tion's RDS network to break through.

G 02 12 22

Activating/deactivating PTY

1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select PTY and press ENTER. > A list of programme types appears:

Current affairs, Information etc. The PTY function is activated by selecting programme types and deactivated by clearing all PTYs.

5. Select the desired programme types or Clear all PTY

Search PTY

This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type.

1. Activate PTY.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.

If the radio finds any of the selected pro- gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis- play. Press the navigation button to con- tinue searching for another broadcast of the selected programme types.

Display of programme type

The programme type of the current station can be shown on the display.

NOTE

Not all radio stations support this function.

Activating/deactivating display

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.

Radio text

Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content, artists, etc. This informa- tion can be shown on the display.

Activating/deactivating radio text

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.

Automatic frequency update AF

The AF function selects one of the strongest transmitters for a set station. The radio may sometimes need to search through the entire FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If this occurs, the radio mutes and PI seekEXIT

to cancel appears in the display.

Activating/deactivating AF

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.

Regional radio programmes REG

This function causes the radio to con- tinue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low. Regional indicates that the function

is active. The regional function is normally deactivated.

G 02 12 23

Activating/deactivating REG

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

263

Enhanced Other Networks EON

The EON function is especially useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the cur- rent audio source.

Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.

Distant interrupts if the station transmit- ter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.

Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.

Activating/deactivating EON

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to EON and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press ENTER.

Resetting RDS functions

Resets all radio settings to the original factory settings.

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Reset all and press ENTER.

Volume control, programme types

The interrupting programme types are heard at the volume selected for each programme type. If the volume level is adjusted during the pro- gramme interruption, the new level is saved until the next programme interruption.

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CD function controls

G 01 98 07

Navigation button Fast forward/rewind, track selection and menus

CD changer position selection*

CD insertion/eject

CD insertion/eject slot

MODE - Selection of audio source (CD, AUX, USB*)

TUNING - Knob for track selection

Starting playback (CD player)

If a music CD is in the player when the audio system is in CD mode then playback is started

automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and change to CD mode by pressing MODE.

Start playback (CD changer*)

If a CD position with a music CD is already selected when the audio system is activated then playback starts automatically. Otherwise change to CD changer mode using MODE and select a disc with the number buttons 16 or Up/Down on the navigation button.

Insert a CD

1. Select an empty position with buttons 1

6 or Up/Down on the navigation button. > An empty position is marked on the dis-

play. The text Insert disc shows that a new disc can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.

2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.

CD eject

A CD will stay in the ejected position for approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re- inserted in the player and playback continues.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but- ton (3).

Eject all discs with a long press on the eject button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by disc. The message EJECT ALL is shown in the display.

Pause

If the volume is turned down completely, the CD player is stopped. The player is restarted when volume is increased.

Audio files*

The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3 and WMA format audio files.

NOTE

Certain types of copy-protected audio files cannot be read by the player.

When a CD containing audio files is inserted into the player the disc's folder structure is loa- ded in. It may take a while before playback starts due to the quality of the disc.

Navigation and playback

If a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player then the disc's folder structure is shown by pressing ENTER. The folder struc- ture is navigated in the same way as the audio system's menu structure. Audio files have the symbol and folders have the symbol . Start audio file playback with ENTER.

When the playback of a file is finished the play- back of the other files in the same folder con- tinues. Folder change takes place automati-

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

265

cally when all files in the current folder have been played back.

Press left/right on the navigation button if the display is not wide enough to show the whole audio file name.

Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio

files

Short presses right/left on the navigation but- ton are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or the steering wheel keypad) can also be used for this purpose.

Scan CD

This function plays the first 10 seconds of each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play- back of the current CD track/audio file.

Random

This function plays the tracks in random order. The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol- led through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks 1 on the current disc.

Different messages appear on the display depending on which random function has been selected:

RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played

RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.

RND FLD means that the audio files in a folder on the current CD are played.

Activating/deactivating, random (CD

player)

If a normal music CD is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

If a disc with audio files is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press ENTER.

Activating/deactivating, random (CD

changer)

If a normal music CD is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press ENTER.

The option All discs only applies to the music CDs in the changer.

If a CD with audio files is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press ENTER.

The function is deactivated when another CD is selected.

Disc text

If title information is stored on a music CD then it can be shown on the display2.

Activate/deactivate

1. Start CD playback.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.

1 Applies to the CD changer. 2 Applies to CD changer.

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

266

CDs

Using low quality CD discs could result in poor or non-existent sound.

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure audio system

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267

Overview

FM MENU1

1. News

2. TP

3. PTY

4. Radio text

5. Advanced radio settings

6.* Audio settings

AM MENU

1.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD player with CD disc.

1. Random

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text

5.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD player with MP3 disc.

1. Playlist

2. Random

3. News

4. TP

5. Disc text

6.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD changer* with CD disc selected.

1. Random

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text

5.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD changer* with MP3 disc selected.

1. Playlist

2. Random

3. News

4. TP

5. Disc text

6.* Audio settings

AUX MENU

1. AUX input volume

2. News

3. TP

4.* Audio settings

USB MENU*

1. Playlist

2. Random

3. News

4. TP

5. Track information

6. Audio settings

1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Phone system components.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269

Phone system components

Antenna1

Steering wheel keypad. Most phone sys- tem functions can be accessed via the key- pad. see page 270.

Microphone. The microphone for hands- free is fitted in the roof by the sun visor.

Centre console control panel. All phone functions (except call volume) can be regu- lated via the control panel.

SIM card reader

General

Always put traffic safety first.

Switch off the phone system when refuel- ling the car.

Switch off the system near blasting work.

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out phone system servicing.

Emergency calls

Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made without a SIM card as long as there is coverage by a network operator.

Making an emergency call

1. Activate the phone.

2. Ring the emergency number that applies to your region (within EU: 112).

3. Press ENTER.

IDIS

With the IDIS system (Intelligent Driver Information System), incoming phone calls and SMS messages can be delayed so that con- centration can be focused on driving when IDIS determines that the traffic situation requires a high level of attention.

Incoming calls and SMS messages can be delayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. If the current traffic situation still requires a high level of attention from the driver then the incoming call is diverted to the voice mail. Missed calls are shown in the display.

IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5, see page 275.

SIM card

G 02 02 44

The phone can only be used with a valid SIM card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are available from various network operators. Con- tact your network operator if you experience difficulties with the SIM card.

NOTE

The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact your network operator if a replacement SIM card is required.

1 Available only for built-in phone or RTI.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Extra SIM card

Many network operators offer two SIM cards for the same phone number. The extra SIM card can be used in the car.

Inserting the SIM card

1. Switch off the phone and open the glove- box.

2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM card reader, see illustration on page 269.

3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of the SIM card should align with the bevel of the SIM card holder.

4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.

Menus

Page 275 describes how to control phone functions with the menu system.

Traffic safety

For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu system cannot be accessed at speeds in excess of 8 km/h.

Phone controls

G 01 98 09

Centre console control panel.

VOLUME - Control the background vol- ume from the radio, for example, during a call

Number and letter buttons

MENU - Opens the main menu

EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char- acters

Navigation button Scroll in menus and character rows

ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but- ton reveals latest dialled numbers

PHONE - On/off and standby mode

Steering wheel keypad

G 02 02 43

When the phone is active, the steering wheel keypad is locked to phone functions. To con- trol the audio system, the phone must be in standby mode (standby).

ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but- ton reveals latest dialled numbers.

EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char- acters. Changes between the audio menu and the phone menu.

Call volume Increase/decrease

Navigation buttons Scroll in menus

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271

On/Off

A handset appears in the display when the phone system is active or in standby mode (standby). If the remote control key is turned to position 0 when the phone is in one of these modes, the phone automatically resumes this mode the next time the remote control key is turned to position I or II.

Activating the phone system

Phone system functions can only be used when the phone is in active mode.

1. Press PHONE.

2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press ENTER.

Deactivating the phone system

No calls can be received when the phone sys- tem is deactivated.

Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is deactivated.

Standby mode (standby)

In standby mode, the audio system can be in use while calls are received. However, it is not possible to make calls when in standby mode.

Putting the phone in standby mode

The phone must first be in active mode before it can be put in standby mode.

Press PHONE.

Activating from standby mode

Press PHONE.

Making and receiving calls

To call

1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).

2. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 273.

3. Press ENTER.

Receiving a call

For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see page 275.

Press ENTER.

Ending a call

Press EXIT.

Refusing a call

Press EXIT.

Call waiting

A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates that there is another incoming call. Answer? is shown in the display. The call can be refused or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.

Putting a call on hold/resuming a call

1. Press MENU or ENTER.

2. Scroll to Hold or Resume and press ENTER.

Dialling a third party

1. Put the call on hold.

2. Dial the number of the third party.

Switching between calls

1. Press MENU or ENTER.

2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.

Starting a conference call

A conference call consists of three parties that can talk to one another. Once a conference call has been initiated, no more parties can be con- nected. All calls are ended when a conference call is ended.

1. Start two phone calls.

2. Press MENU or ENTER.

3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volume

The phone uses the driver's door speaker.

Call volume

Call volume is regulated with the steering wheel keypad.

Audio system volume

Audio system volume is temporarily lowered during a phone call. Once the call is ended the previous volume is resumed. If the volume is regulated during the call, the new level is retained once the call is ended. Sound can also be automatically muted during a phone call, see menu 6.4.3, on page 275. This function only applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys- tem.

Entering text

Text is entered using the phone keypad.

1. Press the key with the desired character - once for the first character on the button, twice for the second, etc. See table.

2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a row are to be entered using the same but- ton, press * or wait a few seconds.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters.

Key Function

space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )

a b c 2

d e f 3

g h i 4

j k l 5

m n o 6

p q r s 7

t u v 8

w x y z 9

Pressed briefly if two char- acters shall be entered after each other with the same key.

Key Function

+ 0 @ * # & $ / %

Switch between upper and lower case.

Handling numbers

Calling the last number dialled

The phone automatically stores the last phone numbers dialled.

1. Press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.

Phonebook

If the phone book contains a live caller's con- tact information then this is shown in the dis- play. Contact information can be stored on the SIM card and in the phone.

Storing contacts in the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to New contact and press ENTER.

4. Enter a name and press ENTER.

5. Enter a number and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273

6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and press ENTER.

Searching for contacts in the phone book

Use the down arrow of the navigation button instead of MENU for direct access to the Search menu.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

4. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

Copying entries between the SIM card

and Phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM

and press ENTER.

Deleting contacts from the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

4. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press ENTER.

6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.

Erase all contacts

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and press ENTER.

If required, enter phone code. The factory-set default code is 1234.

Speed dial

A keypad button (19) can be used as a speed dial number for a contact in the phone book.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Speed dial and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select numbers and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for the speed dial number and press ENTER.

6. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu system.

Calling using speed dial

Briefly press the required keypad button, followed by ENTER.

NOTE

It takes a short time before speed dialling becomes available after the phone has been activated.

To use the speed dial function Speed dial

must be activated in the Phone book menu, see page 277.

Calling from the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER. > All contacts in the phone book memory

are displayed. The number of contacts displayed can be reduced by entering part of the contact's name.

3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Press ENTER to dial.

NOTE

Hold in the required letter/button in the key- pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor- responding letter in the phone book.

Functions during a call

Several functions are available during a call. Some functions can only be used when a call is on hold.

Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access the In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol- lowing alternatives:

1. Mute microphone/Microphone on Mute mode.

2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or resume a call.

3. Phone book Show phone book.

4. Join Conference calling (available if more than two parties are connected)

5. Swap Switch between two calls (availa- ble if up to three parties are connected).

SMS - Short Message Service

Reading SMS

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER. > The message text is shown in the dis-

play. Additional selections can be made by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT

depressed to leave the menu system.

Writing and sending

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.

4. Enter text and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.

6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.

IMEI number

To block the phone, you must provide your network operator with the phone's IMEI num- ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro- grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show this number in the display. Write it down and keep it in a safe place.

Specifications

Output 2 W

SIM card Small

Memory entries 250A

SMS (Short Message Serv- ice)

Yes

Data/Fax No

Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes

A In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that are available on the SIM card.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275

Phone menu

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialled calls

1.4. Erase list

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls

1.4.3. Received calls

1.4.4. Dialled numbers

1.5. Call duration

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

2.2. New contact

2.3. Copy all

2.3.1. SIM to phone

2.3.2. Phone to SIM

2.4. Speed dial

2.4.1. Active

2.4.2. Select numbers

2.5. Erase SIM

2.6. Erase phone

2.7. Memory status

3. Messages

3.1. Read

3.2. Write new

3.3. Message settings

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time

3.3.3. Message type

4 Call options

4.1. Send my number

4.2. Call waiting

4.3. Automatic answer

4.4. Auto re-dial

4.5. Voice mail number

4.6. Diversions

4.6.1. All calls

4.6.2. When busy

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Change phone

5.1. Carphone

5.2. Add phone

5.37. Added phones1

NOTE

The menu above only applies to cars with BluetoothTM handsfree.

6. Phone settings

6.1. Network selection

6.1.1. Automatic

6.1.2. Manual select

6.2. SIM security

6.2.1. On

6.2.2. Off

1 A maximum of 5 phones.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

6.2.3. Automatic

6.3. Edit PIN code

6.4. Sounds and volume

6.4.1. Ring volume

6.4.2. Ring signals

6.4.3. Mute radio

6.4.4. Message beep

6.5. IDIS

6.6. Reset phone settings

Description of menu options

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed

List of missed calls. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.2. Last 10 received

List of received calls. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.3. Last 10 dialled

List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.4. Erase list

Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 as below.

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls

1.4.3. Received calls

1.4.4. Dialled numbers

1.5. Call duration

Duration of all calls or of the most recent call. To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

Search for a name in the phone book.

2.2. New contact

Store names and phone numbers in the phone book, see page 272.

2.3. Copy all

Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM card to the phone memory.

2.3.1. SIM to phone

2.3.2. Phone to SIM

2.4. Speed dial

A number stored in the phone book can be stored as a speed dial number.

2.4.1 Active

2.4.2 Select numbers

2.5. Erase SIM

Erase the entire SIM card memory.

2.6. Erase phone

Erase the entire phone memory.

2.7. Memory status

Shows how many positions are occupied in the SIM card and phone memory. The table shows how many of the total number of positions are occupied, e.g. 100 (250).

3. Messages

3.1. Read

Received text messages. Select whether to erase, forward, change or save the entire mes- sage or parts of it.

3.2. Write new

Write a message using the keypad. Choose whether to save or send it.

3.3. Message settings

Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes- sage centre to which messages are to be trans- ferred as well as how long they are to be saved at the message centre. Contact your network

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277

operator for information on message settings. Normally, these settings should not be altered.

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time

3.3.3. Message type

4. Call settings

4.1. Send my number

Displays or hides your phone number to/from the person you call. Contact your network operator regarding ex-directory numbers.

4.2. Call waiting

Be alerted during a phone call that there is another incoming call.

4.3. Auto answer

Automatically answers incoming calls.

4.4. Auto redial

Automatically calls a previously engaged num- ber.

4.5. Voice mail number

Stores voice mail number.

4.6. Call divert

Choose when and what type of calls are to be diverted to a specified phone number.

4.6.1. All calls

This setting only applies during the call in pro- gress.

4.6.2 When busy

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Change phone

5.1. Car phone

Select the built-in phone.

5.2. Add phone

Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.

5.3-7. Added phones

Select to connect to one of the added phones (up to 5 phones).

NOTE

The menu above only applies to cars with BluetoothTM handsfree.

6. Phone settings

6.1. Selecting network

Choose a network automatically or manually. The selected network is shown in the display in the phone's basic mode.

6.1.1. Automatic

6.1.2. Manual select

6.2. SIM security

Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the phone should automatically give the PIN code.

6.2.1. On

6.2.2. Off

6.2.3. Automatic

6.3. Edit PIN code

Change PIN code. Write down and save the code in a safe place.

6.4. Sounds and volume

6.4.1. Ring volume

Adjust the ring tone volume.

6.4.2. Ring signals

There are seven different ring tones.

6.4.3. Mute radio

The radio can be switched off/on.

6.4.4. Message beep

6.5. IDIS

If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving situation.

6.6. Reset phone settings

Reset the system's factory settings.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

System overview.

Mobile phone

Microphone

Centre console

BluetoothTM

A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM

can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys- tem. The audio system then works handsfree, with the option to control a range of the mobile phone's functions remotely. The microphone is fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone can always be operated by its own keys irre- spective of whether or not it is connected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.

Menus and controls

The menus are navigated using the control panel in the centre console (3), see page 270.

Remember

The menus are controlled from the centre con- sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen- eral information on menus, see page 275.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with both BluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phone then there is an additional menu in the phone menu, see page 275.

Activate/deactivate

A short press on PHONE activates the hands- free function. The text PHONE at the top of the display shows that it is in phone mode. The symbol shows that the handsfree func- tion is active.

One long press on PHONE deactivates the handsfree function and disconnects a con- nected phone.

Connect mobile phone

A mobile phone is connected in different ways depending on whether or not it has been con- nected previously. To connect a mobile phone for the first time, follow the instructions below:

Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system

1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible via BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's manual or www.volvocars.com.

2. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. > Menu option Add phone appears on

the display. If one or more mobile phones have already been registered then these are also shown.

3. Select Add phone. > The audio system searches for mobile

phones in the vicinity. The search takes approximately 30 seconds. The mobile phones detected are specified with their respective BluetoothTM name in the dis- play. The handsfree function's BluetoothTM name is shown in the mobile phone as My Volvo Car.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279

4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the audio system display.

5. Enter the number series shown in the audio system display via the mobile phone key- pad.

Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system

1. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. If there is a phone connected, disconnect the connected phone.

2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's manual.

3. Select My Volvo Car in the list of units detected in your mobile phone.

4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile phone when prompted for the PIN code.

5. Select to connect to My Volvo Car from the mobile phone.

The mobile phone is registered and connected automatically to the audio system while the text Synchronising is shown in the display. For more information on how mobile phones are registered, see page 280.

When the connection is established the symbol is shown and the mobile phone's

BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now

the mobile phone can be controlled from the audio system.

To call

1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.

2. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 281.

3. Press ENTER.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phone

Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's range. For more information on connection, see page 280.

Manual disconnection takes place by deacti- vating the handsfree function with one long press on PHONE. The handsfree function is also deactivated when the engine is switched off or when a door is opened1.

When the mobile phone has been discon- nected an ongoing call can be continued with the mobile phone's built-in microphone and speaker.

NOTE

Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming call

Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the audio system is in CD or FM mode for example. Refuse or end with EXIT.

Auto answer

The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically. Activate/ deactivate under Phone Menu Call

options Automatic answer.

In-call menu

Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call to access the following functions:

Mute microphone - audio system micro- phone is muted.

Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.

1 Applies to Keyless Drive.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.

Phone book searching in the phone book.

NOTE

A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.

Audio settings

Call volume

Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Use the steering wheel keypad.

Audio system volume

In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol- ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.

The audio source can be automatically muted for incoming calls under Phone Menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Mute radio.

Ring volume

Go to Phone Menu Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring volume

and adjust with / on the navigation but- ton.

Ring signals

The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- nals that can be selected under Phone

Menu Phone settings Sounds and

volume Ring signals Ring signal 1

etc.

NOTE

The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ring signal2, go to Phone Menu Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

signals Use mobile phone signal.

More on registering and connecting

A maximum of three mobile phones can be registered. Registration is performed once per phone. After registration the mobile phone is in the list of added phones. Not more than one mobile phone can be connected at a time. Phones can be deregistered under Phone

Menu Bluetooth Remove phone.

Automatic connection

When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically. When the audio sys- tem searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the display. To change over to manual connection of another phone, press EXIT.

Manual connection

If you want to connect a mobile phone other than the last connected or change the con- nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:

Set the audio system in phone mode (PHONE) and follow the instructions on the display or change the connected mobile phone by using the menu system as described below.

The menu structure is available in two variants depending on whether the car only has

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281

BluetoothTM or if the car also has a built-in phone.

For cars with only BluetoothTM the connec- tion is made under Phone Menu

Bluetooth Change phone Add

phone or select one of the previously con- nected phones.

For cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM the connection is made under Phone Menu Change phone Add

phone or select one of the previously con- nected phones.

Phonebook

All use of the phone book presupposes that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each registered mobile phone. The phone book is copied automatically to the audio system during each connection. Deacti- vate the function under Phone settings

Synchronise phone book. Searching for con- tacts is only performed in the connected mobile phone's phone book.

NOTE

If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller's contact information then this is shown in the display.

Searching for contacts

The easiest way to search in the phone book is with long presses on the keys 29. This starts a search in the phone book based on the key's first letter.

The phone book can also be reached with / on the navigation button or with / on

the steering wheel keypad. The search can also be performed from the phone book's Search menu under Phone book Search:

1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to call.

Voice recognition

The mobile phone's voice recognition function for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the voice recognition func- tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.

Voice mail number

The number to the voice mail is changed under Call options Voice mail number. If no number is stored then this menu is reached with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored number.

Call lists

The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- tion at each new connection and are then updated during the connection. Press ENTER

to show the last dialled. Other call lists are available under Call register.

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled numbers in reverse order.

Inputting text

Input text using the keypad in the centre con- sole. Press once for the key's first character,

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for more characters, see the table on page 272.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input characters. / on the navigation button scrolls between the characters.

Menu structure - BluetoothTM

handsfree

NOTE

The menu for BluetoothTM handsfree is available in two variants. For cars with only BluetoothTM handsfree and for cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree.

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialled calls

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

3. Bluetooth

3.1. Change phone

3.1.1. Add phone

3.1.26.Added phones3

3.2. Remove phone

3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone

3.4. Car Bluetooth info

4. Call options

4.1. Automatic answer

4.2. Voice mail number

5. Phone settings

5.1. Sounds and volume

5.1.1. Ring volume

5.1.2. Ring signals

5.1.3. Mute radio

5.2. Synchronise phone book

Menu structure - BluetoothTM

handsfree with built-in phone

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialled calls

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

3. Bluetooth

3.1. Remove phone

3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone

3.3. Car Bluetooth info

4. Call options

4.1. Automatic answer

4.2. Voice mail number

5. Change phone

5.1. Carphone

5.2. Add phone

5.37. Added phones3

3 A maximum of 5 phones.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283

6. Phone settings

6.1. Sounds and volume

6.1.1. Ring volume

6.1.2. Ring signals

6.1.3. Mute radio

6.2. Synchronise phone book

284

Type designation................................................................................... 286 Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 288 Engine specifications............................................................................ 291 Engine oil............................................................................................... 292 Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 294 Fuel....................................................................................................... 297 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 299 Electrical system................................................................................... 301 Type approval....................................................................................... 303 Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 304

SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

286

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

287

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. S40 and V50: The label is visible when the right rear door is opened. C30 and C70: The label is visible when the right door is opened.

Label for parking heater.

Engine code, component and serial num- bers.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber:

manual gearbox

, automatic gearbox

The car's identification number (VIN Vehicle Identification Number).

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

288

Dimensions

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2640

B Length 4522

C Load length, floor, folded seat 1766

D Load length, floor 989

E Load height 685

F Height 1457

Dimensions mm

G Front track 1548A

1535B

H Rear track 1544A

1531B

I Load width, floor 1002

J Width 1770 (1785C)

Dimensions mm

K Width including door mirrors 2022

L Width including folded- in door mirrors 1845

A with 15" wheel B with 16" and 17" wheels C with Keyless drive*

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

289

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the payload and is not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- out extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the acces- sory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car- pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For decal location, see page 286.

Max. total weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

290

Towing capacity and towball load

Engine Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

1.6 1200 50

DRIVe 1300 75

D2 1300 75

2.0F 1350 75

2.0 1350 75

others 1500 75

Engine Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

1.6, 2.0 and 2.0F 650 50

others 700 50

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

291

Overview

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine

codeA

Output (kW/rpm)

Output (hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/ rpm)

No. of cylinders

Bore (mm)

Stroke (mm)

Swept volume (litres)

Com- pression

ratio

1.6 B4164S3 74/6000 100/6000 150/4000 4 79 81.4 1.596 11.0:1

2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1

2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1

T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500 5000 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1

DRIVe D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1

D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1

D3 D5204T5 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1

D4 D5204T 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 286.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

292

Adverse driving conditions

Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C

The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

293

Engine oil grade

Engine Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

1.6 B4164S3 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

approx. 4.0

2.0F B4204S4 approx. 4.3

2.0 B4204S3 approx. 4.3

DRIVe D4162T approx. 3.8

D2 D4162T approx. 3.8

T5 B5254T7 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

approx. 5.8

D3 D5204T5 approx. 5.9

D4 D5204T approx. 5.9

For filling engine oil, see page 222.

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

294

Overview

IMPORTANT

The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a dif- ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby for servicing. Volvo recommends that you con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Gearbox oil

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

IB5 2.1 BOT 130 M

B6 1.6

BOT 350M3MTX75 1.8

M66 1.9

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

MPS6 7.3 BOT 341

AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

TF-80SC 7.0 AW1

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

295

Fluids

Fluid System Volume (litres)

Recommended oil grade

Coolant 1.6 5.8 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. The thermostat starts opening at:

petrol engine (1.6) 82 C

petrol engines 90 C

diesel engines 82 C

diesel engine (D2) 83 C

2.0 and 2.0F 6.5

T5, automatic gearbox

7.5

D2 and DRIVe 6.2

D3 and D4 8.5

Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a)

Oil: PAG

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steer- ing fluid

Power steering 1.0 1.2 WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product with same specifications.

Washer fluid 4-cyl. Petrol/Die- sel

4.0 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.

5-cyl. Petrol/Die- sel

6.5

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

296

Fluid System Volume (litres)

Recommended oil grade

Fuel Petrol: 1.6, 2.0, 2.0F

approx. 55

Petrol: see page 147

Petrol: T5 approx. 62

Diesel: D2 and DRIVe

approx. 52

Diesel: see page 148

Diesel: D3 and D4 approx. 60

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

297

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

A B C

2.0F 254 (242A) 10.9 (14.8A) 137 (135A) 5.9 (8.2A) 180 (174A) 7.7 (10.6A)

2.0 251 10.8 133 5.7 176 7.6

T5 315 13.5 151 6.5 211 9.0

DRIVe 112 4.3 92 3.5 99 3.8

D2 137 5.2 101 3.8 114 4.3

D3 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1

D3 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8

D4 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1

D4 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8

A E85

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

298

: gram/km

: litre/100 km

A = urban driving

B = extra-urban driving

C = combined driving

Fuel consumption and emissions of

carbon dioxide

Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles1, that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon diox- ide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:

The driver's driving style.

If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the mod- el's basic version, then resistance increa- ses.

High speed results in increased wind resis- tance.

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.

To bear in mind

Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption:

Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel- eration as well as braking too hard.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre pressure table on page 299.

Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

See further information and more advice on pages 13 and 144.

See page 146 for general information on fuel.

1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with a D2 engine and 6-speed manual transmission with Start/Stop is started in 2nd gear. - The value for combined driving, which is given in the table, according to legislation, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving. CO2 emission - to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the two driving cycles, the exhaust gases are collected. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

11 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

11

299

Approved tyre pressures

Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load

Front (kPa)A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB

D2

DRIVe

195/65 R15 0160 210 210 270 270 270

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/55 R16 0160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17 0160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 260 220 280 260 -

1.6

2.0

2.0F

195/65 R15

205/55 R16

0160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17

215/45 R18C

0160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 260 220 280 260 -

T5

205/55 R16 0160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 260 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17

215/45 R18

0160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 270 220 290 270 -

11 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

11

300

Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load

Front (kPa)A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB

D3

D4

205/55 R16

205/50 R17

215/45 R18

0160 230 220 250 250 250

160+ 270 220 290 270 -

Temporary Spare Tyre 080 420 420 420 420 -

A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. B Economical driving, see page 198. C The 1.6 cannot be specified with this tyre.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

301

General

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the vehicle. If the starter battery is replaced, therefore, you must ensure that you switch to a battery with the same

capacity as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

Battery

Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,

CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)

Reserve capacity

(minutes)

Capacity (Ah)

12 590 100 60

760 A 120 70

12 700 B 135 80

A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.

Bulbs

Lighting Output (W) Type

Dipped beam, halogen 55 H7 LL

Main beam, halogen 55 H9

Extra main beam, Dual Xenon/ABL 55 H7 LL

Front direction indicators, halogen/Dual Xenon 21 PY21W LL

Front direction indicators, ABL 24 PY24W SV

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

302 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lighting Output (W) Type

Position/Parking lamps, front (Dual Xenon/halogen), Side marker lamps, front 5 W5W LL

Fog lamps 35 H8

Side direction indicators, door mirrors 5 WY5W LL

Front courtesy lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d

Glovebox lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d

Vanity mirror lighting* 1.2 Socket SV5.5 Length 35 mm

Cargo area lighting 10 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm

Number plate lighting 5 C5W LL

Rear direction indicators 21 PY21W LL

Position/Side marker lamps, rear 5 P21/5W LL

Reversing lamp, Rear fog lamp 21 P21W LL

11 Specifications

Type approval

11

303

Remote control key system

Country and region

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, E, EST, F, FIN, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, SK, SLO

Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control key system conforms to the essential char- acteristic require- ments and other rel- evant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

IS, LI, N, CH

HR

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R- LPD1-03-0151

BR

TW

ETC093LPD0155

Certification of the Keyless Drive system

Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies that this equipment type 5WK4 8952, 5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

11

304 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found. For more information on symbols and text messages, see pages 52 and 56.

- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time.

- Yellow information symbol, illuminates in combination with text in the information dis- play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys- tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor- mation can also illuminate in combination with other symbols.

Symbols in the display

Indicator and warning symbols in the

combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page

Warning 19, 30, 52, 55, 163

Information 52, 55, 163, 172, 174

Emissions system

52, 53

Fault in the ABS system

53, 54

Rear fog lamp 53

Symbol Meaning Page

Stability sys- tem, DSTC*

53, 171, 172

Engine pre- heater (diesel)

53

Low level in fuel tank

53

Indicator symbol for trailer

54

Parking brake applied

54

Airbags - SRS 19, 54

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 305

Symbol Meaning Page

Low oil pres- sure

52, 54

Seatbelt reminder

16, 54

Alternator not charging

54

Fault in brake system

54, 169

Main beam indicator

51

Symbol Meaning Page

Left direction indicators

51

Right direc- tion indicators

51

Other information symbols in the

combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page

Rain sensor* 68

Cruise control* 70

Gear shift indicator* 159

Information symbols in the centre

console display

Symbol Meaning Page

G 02 12 16

Surround sound (only Premium Sound)

257

G 02 12 21

News 261

G 02 12 22

Programme types 261

G 02 12 23

Regional radio pro- grammes

262

Audio files 264

Directory in CD disc 264

G 02 12 20

Traffic information 261

Phone* 278

BluetoothTM hands- free*

278

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

11

306

Information symbols in the roof console

display

Symbol Meaning Page

Seatbelt reminder 17

Airbag, passenger seat, activated

22, 23

Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated

23

11 Specifications

11

307

12 Alphabetical Index

12

308

A

A/C electronic climate control..................... 99 manual climate control................... 94, 95

ABS fault............................................ 53, 169

Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 61

Active headlamps...................................... 61

Adaptation............................................... 157

Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 104

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 191 halogen headlamp.............................. 191

AF automatic frequency update........... 262

Airbag........................................................ 20 activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22 driver's and front passenger side......... 21 key switch off........................................ 22

AIRBAG ..................................................... 20

Airbag system............................................ 20

Air conditioning.......................................... 94 ECC...................................................... 97 general.................................................. 92

Air distribution.......................................... 100 ECC...................................................... 98

Air distribution, A/C................................... 95

Air quality system, ECC............................. 98

Air vents..................................................... 93

Alarm........................................................ 138 alarm indicator.................................... 138 alarm signals....................................... 139 arming................................................. 138 automatic alarm activation................. 139 deactivating a triggered alarm............ 139 disarming............................................ 138 RDS traffic warning............................. 261 reduced alarm level............................ 139 testing the alarm system.................... 139

Alcolock................................................... 150

Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 132

Approach light, duration.................... 79, 126 setting................................................... 84

Audio, see also Sound............................. 254

Audio volume phone.......................................... 272, 280 phone/media player............................ 280 programme types............................... 263 ring signal, phone............................... 280

Auto climate control settings........................ 97

AUTO storing stations................................... 259

Auto climate............................................... 97

Automatic car washes............................. 210

Automatic gearbox manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 160 towing and recovery........................... 178 trailer........................................... 182, 183

Automatic locking.................................... 135

Automatic relocking................................. 134

Autostart.................................................. 154

Auto volume control................................ 257

Auxiliary heater........................................ 104

Average fuel consumption......................... 65

B

Backrest front seat, lowering............................. 109

Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 118

Bag holder............................................... 123

Bass speaker........................................... 256

Battery............................................. 230, 301 changing the battery in the remote con- trol key................................................ 133 maintenance............................... 219, 230

12 Alphabetical Index

12

309

overload.............................................. 145 specifications...................................... 301 start assistance................................... 181 symbols on the battery....................... 230 warning symbols................................. 230

Bioethanol E85........................................ 147

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 175

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 80, 175

Bluetooth handsfree............................................ 278 mute microphone............................... 279 transfer call to mobile......................... 279

Bluetooth media.................................................. 256 streaming audio.................................. 256

Bonnet, opening...................................... 220

Booster cushion folding up.............................................. 37 lowering................................................ 38

Booster cushion, integrated...................... 37

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 226

Brake light.................................................. 63

Brakes anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 169 brake light............................................. 63

Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 170 emergency brake lights...................... 170 handbrake............................................. 74

Brake system........................................... 169

Bulb holder removal............................................... 237

Bulbs changing............................................. 234

Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 234, 301

C

Calls functions during a call................ 271, 274 incoming............................................. 279 operation..................................... 271, 279 volume in phone................................. 272

Car care................................................... 210

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 212

Cargo area............................................... 120 cargo cover................................. 121, 122 lighting................................................ 112 loading................................................ 190 safety grille.......................................... 120 safety net.................................... 120, 122

Cargo cover..................................... 121, 122

Car settings............................................... 84

Car upholstery......................................... 212

Car wash.................................................. 210

Catalytic converter................................... 147 recovery.............................................. 178

CD discs storage compartment......................... 116

CD functions............................................ 264

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 225

Checking the engine oil level................... 222

Checks fluids and oils...................................... 222

Children..................................................... 31 child safety locks.......................... 38, 137 child seats and side airbags................. 24 location in the car................................. 31 location in the car, table....................... 32 safety.................................................... 31

Child safety locks.................................... 137

Child seat................................................... 31

Child seats................................................. 31 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 38

12 Alphabetical Index

12

310

size classes for child seats with the ISO- FIX fixture system................................. 39 upper mounting points for child seats.. 42

Cigarette lighter socket front seat............................................... 58

Cleaning automatic car washes......................... 210 car wash............................................. 210 rims..................................................... 210 seatbelts............................................. 213 upholstery........................................... 212

Climate control general.................................................. 92 personal preferences............................ 83

Climate control settings auto....................................................... 97

Clock, adjustment...................................... 83

Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 226

Coat hanger............................................. 115

Cold start................................................. 162 automatic gearbox.............................. 162

Collision crash mode........................................... 30 inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 26

Colour code, paint................................... 214

Combined instrument panel...................... 51

Compass................................................... 77 calibration............................................. 77 setting the zone.................................... 77

Condensation in headlamps.................... 210

Coolant.................................................... 225

Cooling system........................................ 144

Crash, see Collision................................... 30

Cruise control............................................ 70

D

Deadlock deactivation........................................ 135 temporary deactivation....................... 135

Deadlocks................................................ 135

Defroster.................................................... 95

Diesel....................................................... 148

Diesel: engine preheater............................ 53

Diesel particle filter.................................. 148

Dipstick, electronic.................................. 224

Direction indicators.................................... 64

Disc text................................................... 265

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 162

Display, messages..................................... 56

Display lighting.......................................... 61

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 253, 257

Door mirrors............................................... 79

Driver's door control panel.................. 50, 75

Driving cooling system.................................... 144 economical......................................... 144 in water............................................... 144 slippery driving conditions.................. 145 with trailer........................................... 182

Driving in water........................................ 144

Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 289 towing capacity.................................. 289

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 171

DSTC, see also Stability system symbol.................................................. 53

During a call, functions............................ 274

12 Alphabetical Index

12

311

E

ECC, electronic climate control................. 93

Economical driving.................................. 144

ECO pressure.......................................... 198 table............................................ 198, 299

Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 165

Electrical socket cargo area........................................... 123 centre console...................................... 58 rear seat................................................ 58

Electrical system...................................... 301

Emergency calls...................................... 269

Emergency equipment warning triangle.................................. 199

Emergency puncture repair..................... 203

Emission control fault indicator........................................ 53

Engine block heater................................. 156 fuel-driven........................................... 101

Engine compartment............................... 220 coolant................................................ 225 oil........................................................ 222 power steering fluid............................ 227

Engine oil......................................... 222, 292 adverse driving conditions.................. 292 capacities........................................... 292 filter..................................................... 222 oil grade.............................................. 292 oil pressure........................................... 54

Engine specifications............................... 291

Entry, keyless............................................. 84

Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's manual....................................................... 13

EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 263

Equalizer.................................................. 257

Error messages in BLIS........................... 176

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17

External dimensions................................ 288

Extra mats................................................ 110

F

Fan A/C........................................................ 94 ECC...................................................... 97

Fast-wind................................................. 265

First aid equipment.................................. 200

Flexifuel.................................................... 156 adaptation........................................... 157

Floor mats................................................ 110

Fluids, capacities..................................... 294

Fluids and oils.................................. 222, 294

Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart- ment......................................................... 222

Fluids and oils general............................. 222

Fog lamps rear........................................................ 61

Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 61

Fold down the rear seat backrest ........... 118

Frequency update, automatic.................. 262

Front seats, heated.................................... 95

FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13

Fuel CO2 emissions.................................... 297 consumption....................................... 297 fuel consumption, display..................... 65 fuel economy...................................... 198 fuel filter.............................................. 148 level indicator........................................ 53 parking heater..................................... 101 refuelling............................................. 146

12 Alphabetical Index

12

312

Fuses....................................................... 241 box in the engine compartment.......... 242 changing............................................. 241 general................................................ 241 relay/fuse box in the passenger com- partment............................................. 246

G

Gearbox manual................................................ 159

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 161

Geartronic................................................ 160

General information on fuel..................... 146

Glovebox................................................. 115 locking................................................ 128

Gross vehicle weight............................... 289

GSI - Gear selector assistance........ 159, 166

H

Handbrake................................................. 74

Hazard warning flashers............................ 73

Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 191

Headlamps................................................. 60

Head restraint.......................................... 118

Heating front seats....................................... 95, 99 rearview and door mirrors.............. 95, 99 rear window.................................... 95, 99

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 67

HomeLink ................................................ 86

Home safe lighting............................... 64, 79 setting................................................... 84

I

IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys- tem........................................................... 269

Ignition keys............................................. 155

IMEI number............................................ 274

Immobiliser...................................... 126, 155

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26

Information display.................................... 56

Information on fuel................................... 146

Infotainment system menus................................................. 252

Inlaid mats............................................... 110

Instrument lighting..................................... 61

Instrument overview left-hand drive....................................... 46 right-hand drive.................................... 48

Integrated booster cushion........................ 37

Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 111

Interior rearview mirror............................... 77 automatic dimming............................... 77

Intermittent wiping..................................... 67

iPod , connection................................... 254

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 38

J

Jack......................................................... 199

12 Alphabetical Index

12

313

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 289

Key keyless lock and ignition system........ 130 remote control key.............................. 126

Key blade......................................... 127, 131 active locks......................................... 129

Keyless drive............................ 130, 158, 303 starting the car.................................... 158

Keyless entry............................................. 84

Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 130

Keypad in the steering wheel...... 70, 72, 270

Key positions........................................... 154

Kick-down automatic gearbox.............................. 161

L

Lambda-sond.......................................... 147

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 212

Lighting Active Xenon headlamps...................... 61 approach light, duration............... 79, 126 automatic lighting............................... 112

automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 60 bulbs, specifications........................... 301 cargo area........................................... 112 dipped beam........................................ 60 display lighting...................................... 61 front fog lamps..................................... 61 headlamp levelling................................ 60 home safe lighting.......................... 64, 79 in passenger compartment................. 111 lighting panel, passenger compart- ment...................................................... 60 main/dipped beam......................... 60, 64 position/parking lamps......................... 60 reading lamps..................................... 111 rear fog lamp........................................ 61

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 234 bulb holder, rear................................. 238 cargo area........................................... 239 dipped beam...................................... 235 direction indicators............................. 236 fog lamp.............................................. 237 front.................................................... 234 main beam halogen............................ 235 number plate lighting.......................... 239 parking lamps..................................... 236 position lamps.................................... 236 side marker lamps.............................. 237 vanity mirror........................................ 239

Loading general................................................ 190 load capacity...................................... 190 load retaining eyelets.......................... 122

Load retaining eyelets.............................. 122

Locking.................................................... 131 unlocking............................................ 134

Locking/unlocking................................... 134 inside.................................................. 134 outside................................................ 134

Locks locking................................................ 134

Lubricants................................................ 294

Lubricants, capacities.............................. 294

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 60

Main beam flashing................................................. 64

Main beam "flash"..................................... 64

Maintenance............................................ 219 rustproofing........................................ 215 self-maintenance................................ 219

Making calls..................................... 271, 279

12 Alphabetical Index

12

314

Manual gearbox....................................... 159 GSI - Gear selector assistance... 159, 166 towing and recovery........................... 178

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 160

Max. roof load ......................................... 289

Memory function in seats........................ 109

Menus audio system...................................... 252

Menu structure.......................................... 83 media player....................................... 267 phone, menu options.......................... 276 phone, overview................................. 275

Messages in BLIS.................................... 176

Messages in the information display......... 56

Meters in the combined instrument panel fuel gauge............................................. 51 outside temperature gauge.................. 51 speedometer......................................... 51 tachometer........................................... 51 trip meter.............................................. 51

Misting attending to the windows..................... 92 condensation in headlamps............... 210 rear window.......................................... 95 removing with defroster function.... 95, 98 timer function.................................. 95, 98

Mobile phone connect............................................... 280 handsfree............................................ 278 register phone..................................... 278

Mounting points (child seat)...................... 42

N

News........................................................ 261

O

Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 222, 292

Oil level low.............................................. 222

One-key dial............................................. 273

Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13

Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 181

P

PACOS....................................................... 22

PACOS, switch.......................................... 22

Paintwork colour code......................................... 214 damage and touch-up........................ 214

Parking assistance................................... 173 parking assistance sensors................ 174

Parking brake....................................... 54, 74

Parking heater battery and fuel................................... 101 general................................................ 101 parking on a hill.................................. 101 symbols and display messages.......... 102 time setting......................................... 103

Passenger compartment filter................... 92

Passenger compartment heater fuel-driven........................................... 101

Personal preferences................................. 83 approach light, duration....................... 84 auto blower adjust................................ 83 automatic locking................................. 84 doors unlock......................................... 84 home safe lighting................................ 84 keyless entry......................................... 84 lock confirm. light................................. 84 recirculation timer................................. 83 unlock confirm. light............................. 84

Petrol grade............................................. 147

12 Alphabetical Index

12

315

Phone calling from the phone book............... 273 connect............................................... 280 controls............................................... 270 entering text........................................ 272 handsfree............................................ 278 incoming calls..................................... 279 making calls........................................ 279 on/off.................................................. 271 one-key dial........................................ 273 phone book......................................... 281 phone book, shortcut......................... 281 receiving a call.................................... 279 register phone..................................... 278 standby, standby mode...................... 271 traffic safety........................................ 270

Phone book handling numbers............................... 272

Phone system.......................................... 269

Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 82

Polishing.................................................. 211

Power seat............................................... 108

Powershift gearbox.......................... 162, 178

Power steering fluid, checking and topping up............................................................. 227

Power sunroof........................................... 81

Power windows......................................... 75 blocking................................................ 76 passenger seat..................................... 76 rear seat................................................ 76

Programme type...................................... 262

PTY Programme type........................... 262

Puncture, see Tyres......................... 199, 201

Putting calls on hold................................ 271

R

Radio EON.................................................... 263 frequency update................................ 262 news................................................... 261 programme types............................... 260 radio settings...................................... 259 radio stations...................................... 259 REG.................................................... 262

Radio text................................................ 262

Rain sensor................................................ 68

Random, CD and audio files.................... 265

RDS functions.......................................... 260 resetting.............................................. 263

Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 111

Rear seat ................................................. 118

Rearview and door mirrors automatic retracting/extending...... 79, 84 compass............................................... 77 door...................................................... 79 electrically retractable........................... 79 interior................................................... 77

Recirculation A/C........................................................ 94 ECC...................................................... 98

Recommended child seats ....................... 31

Reduced guard settings................................................. 84

Refrigerant................................................. 92

Refuelling fuel cap............................................... 146 fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 146 refuelling............................................. 146

Refusing a call......................................... 271

REG - Regional radio programmes......... 262

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 241

Remote control........................................ 126 replacing the battery........................... 133

Remote control, HomeLink programmable ..................................... 86

12 Alphabetical Index

12

316

Remote control key................................. 155 battery replacement............................ 133 detachable key blade......................... 127 functions............................................. 126

Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 303

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 79

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 159

Rims cleaning.............................................. 210

Roof load, max. weight ........................... 289

Rustproofing............................................ 215

S

Safety safety systems, table............................ 29

Safety grille.............................................. 120

Safety net......................................... 120, 122

Scan CD and audio files.............................. 265 radio stations...................................... 260

Seatbelt pregnancy............................................. 17 seatbelt tensioner................................. 18

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17

Seatbelts.................................................... 16

Seats head restraints, rear............................ 118 lowering the front backrest................. 109 lowering the rear backrest.................. 118 manual setting.................................... 108 power seat.......................................... 108

Service programme................................. 218

Side airbags............................................... 24

Side airbag SIPS........................................ 24

SIM card.................................................. 269

SIPS bags.................................................. 24

SMS......................................................... 274 read..................................................... 274 write.................................................... 274

Soot filter........................................... 56, 149

Soot filter full............................................ 149

Sound audio settings............................. 254, 256 audio source....................................... 254 volume................................................ 254

Spare wheel............................................. 199 temporary spare......................... 197, 199

Spin control............................................. 171

SRS system general.................................................. 20

Stability and traction control system....... 171

Stains....................................................... 212

Standby, phone....................................... 271

Start assistance....................................... 181

Starting the engine.................................. 154 keyless drive............................... 130, 158

Steering lock............................................ 154

Steering wheel cruise control........................................ 70 keypad.................................... 70, 72, 270 steering wheel adjustment.................... 73

Stone chips and scratches...................... 214

Storage compartment.............................. 114 CD discs............................................. 116

Storage spaces in the passenger compart- ment......................................................... 114

Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 259

Streaming audio...................................... 256

Subwoofer............................................... 256

Sunroof...................................................... 81 opening and closing....................... 81, 82 pinch protection.................................... 82

12 Alphabetical Index

12

317

sunscreen............................................. 82 ventilation position................................ 81

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 82

Surround.......................................... 253, 257

Symbols................................................... 172 indicator symbols........................... 53, 54 warning symbols................................... 52

Symbols and display messages parking heater..................................... 102

T

Tailgate driving with open tailgate................... 145 locking/unlocking........................ 126, 134

Tank volume............................................ 294

Technical data, engine............................. 291

Temperature actual temperature............................... 93 passenger compartment, electronic cli- mate control.......................................... 99 passenger compartment, manual cli- mate control.......................................... 96

Testing the alarm system......................... 139

Timer A/C........................................................ 95 ECC...................................................... 98

Tools........................................................ 199

Total airing function................................. 135

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 184

Towing..................................................... 178 towing eye.......................................... 179

Towing capacity....................................... 289

Towing equipment................................... 184 installation........................................... 186 removing............................................. 188 specifications...................................... 185

Towing eye.............................................. 179

TP Traffic information............................ 261

Traffic information.................................... 261

Trailer....................................................... 182 cable................................................... 184

Trip computer............................................ 65

Tuning Radio............................................ 259

Type approval, remote control key sys- tem........................................................... 303

Type designation..................................... 286

Tyres direction of rotation............................ 197 driving characteristics......................... 194 general................................................ 194 maintenance....................................... 194 pressure...................................... 198, 299 puncture repair................................... 203 specifications...................................... 194 speed ratings...................................... 194 tread wear indicators.......................... 195 winter tyres......................................... 197

U

Unlocking......................................... 131, 134 settings................................................. 84

Upper mounting points, child seat............ 42

USB, connection...................................... 254

V

Ventilation.................................................. 93

Vibration damper..................................... 184

12 Alphabetical Index

12

318

Volume audio system...................................... 254 auto volume control............................ 257 media player....................................... 254

W

Warning lamp stability and traction control system. . 171

Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19

Warning triangle....................................... 199

Washer fluid, filling................................... 225

Washers headlamps............................................ 67 rear window.......................................... 68 washer fluid, filling.............................. 225 windscreen........................................... 67

Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 80

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 211

Waxing..................................................... 211

Weights kerb weight......................................... 289

Wheels changing............................................. 201 installation........................................... 202

removal............................................... 201 rims..................................................... 196 snow chains........................................ 196 spare wheel........................................ 199

Whiplash injury.......................................... 27

WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 27 whiplash injury...................................... 27

Windscreen wipers.................................... 67 rain sensor............................................ 68

Winter tyres.............................................. 197

Wiper rear window.......................................... 68

Wiper blades............................................ 228 cleaning.............................................. 228 replacing, rear window......

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the V50 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo V50 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo V50. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo V50 2012 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.